WO2022227878A1 - Lane line labeling method and apparatus - Google Patents
Lane line labeling method and apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022227878A1 WO2022227878A1 PCT/CN2022/080026 CN2022080026W WO2022227878A1 WO 2022227878 A1 WO2022227878 A1 WO 2022227878A1 CN 2022080026 W CN2022080026 W CN 2022080026W WO 2022227878 A1 WO2022227878 A1 WO 2022227878A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- lane
- obstacle
- line
- point
- lane line
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 41
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 130
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 36
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 claims description 45
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 83
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 61
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 21
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000010187 selection method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009827 uniform distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007781 pre-processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C21/00—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
- G01C21/26—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
- G01C21/34—Route searching; Route guidance
- G01C21/3453—Special cost functions, i.e. other than distance or default speed limit of road segments
- G01C21/3492—Special cost functions, i.e. other than distance or default speed limit of road segments employing speed data or traffic data, e.g. real-time or historical
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C21/00—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C21/00—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
- G01C21/26—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
- G01C21/28—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network with correlation of data from several navigational instruments
- G01C21/30—Map- or contour-matching
- G01C21/32—Structuring or formatting of map data
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C21/00—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
- G01C21/26—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
- G01C21/34—Route searching; Route guidance
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C21/00—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
- G01C21/26—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
- G01C21/34—Route searching; Route guidance
- G01C21/3407—Route searching; Route guidance specially adapted for specific applications
- G01C21/343—Calculating itineraries, i.e. routes leading from a starting point to a series of categorical destinations using a global route restraint, round trips, touristic trips
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C21/00—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
- G01C21/38—Electronic maps specially adapted for navigation; Updating thereof
- G01C21/3804—Creation or updating of map data
- G01C21/3807—Creation or updating of map data characterised by the type of data
- G01C21/3811—Point data, e.g. Point of Interest [POI]
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C21/00—Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
- G01C21/38—Electronic maps specially adapted for navigation; Updating thereof
- G01C21/3804—Creation or updating of map data
- G01C21/3807—Creation or updating of map data characterised by the type of data
- G01C21/3815—Road data
- G01C21/3819—Road shape data, e.g. outline of a route
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S17/00—Systems using the reflection or reradiation of electromagnetic waves other than radio waves, e.g. lidar systems
- G01S17/88—Lidar systems specially adapted for specific applications
- G01S17/89—Lidar systems specially adapted for specific applications for mapping or imaging
Definitions
- the present application relates to the technical field of Internet of Vehicles, and in particular, to a method and device for marking lane lines.
- High-precision maps play a vital role in vehicle positioning, vehicle navigation, and even automatic driving of vehicles.
- High-precision maps are usually made in the following ways: collect the surrounding environment information of real roads, obtain a point cloud map by fusing the surrounding environment information, and mark the structured data of various traffic entities in the point cloud map to obtain High-precision map.
- the traffic entities may include, but are not limited to, lane lines, traffic signs, or traffic lights.
- the high-precision map in the field of Internet of Vehicles is mainly used to guide the passage of vehicles, and to achieve a better guidance effect, the accuracy of the high-precision map must at least reach the lane level. That is to say, how to label lane lines efficiently and accurately is very important for quickly obtaining high-quality high-precision maps so as to accurately guide the passage of vehicles.
- the lane lines There are two main ways to label the lane lines: one is manual labeling, which mainly relies on the human eye of the cartographer to judge the surrounding environment of the lane to be labelled in the point cloud map, and manually label the virtual curve according to the judgment result, but this labeling method is not only time-consuming. It is laborious, and it is not easy to ensure the smoothness and aesthetics of the virtual curve; the second is automatic labeling, mainly using some existing drawing software to automatically draw the curve, but the drawing software usually only considers the entry point and exit point, and does not Consider whether there are obstacles on the current road, in this case, the lane line drawn automatically by the drawing software is likely to intersect with the obstacles on the road, making the lane line unavailable. It can be seen that the existing two lane line labeling methods cannot efficiently and accurately label the lane lines, which is not conducive to improving the labeling efficiency and labeling quality of the lane lines on the map.
- the present application provides a method and device for marking lane lines, which are used to improve the marking efficiency and marking quality of lane lines.
- the present application provides a lane marking method, which is suitable for a lane marking device, and the lane marking device may be a device, device or chip with image processing capability, and may also be a vehicle.
- the method includes: the lane line marking device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, determining the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, and determining the first lane line and the exit point.
- the first lane line is not marked on the map, but from the two sides of the first lane line.
- Select one of the side areas as the target obstacle avoidance area and select at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the entry point at least one control point and the exit point, determine that the minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance second lane line, and mark the second lane line on the map.
- the second lane line that can safely bypass the obstacles in the intersection is re-determined, which helps to pass a marking
- the operation directly marks the second lane line with accurate obstacle avoidance ability at the intersection of the map.
- This method does not need to rely on manual marking or manual secondary adjustment, which can effectively improve the marking quality and marking efficiency of lane lines.
- a control point whose distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected as the determination of the first lane line in one side area of the first lane line.
- the benchmark of the second lane line can also improve the probability of determining the second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance distance requirement, and improve the success rate of marking the lane line.
- the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line.
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any one of the following: if the first lane line is the lane edge adjacent to the obstacle, then the first The minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is a lane edge not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance and the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0.
- the target obstacle avoidance area can satisfy at least one of the following conditions:
- the target obstacle avoidance area is located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication.
- This condition can mark the lane line that meets the traffic regulations in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle, effectively reducing the risk of violation of the vehicle using the map.
- Condition 2 When the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area does not contain obstacles. In this condition, the control point is better selected in the area without obstacles than in the area containing obstacles, so this condition helps to improve the efficiency of subsequent selection of control points in the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the target obstacle avoidance area includes the obstacle area with the smallest area among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line. This condition can quickly select the target obstacle avoidance area by comparing the area of the obstacle areas on both sides.
- the target obstacle avoidance area includes the obstacle area with the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line.
- the target obstacle avoidance area by taking the side area where the obstacle area with the longest distance and the smallest distance from the first lane line is located as the target obstacle avoidance area, you can rely on the positional relationship between the first lane line and the obstacle to pass a smaller area.
- the deformation of obtains the second lane line, which helps to reduce the difficulty of redefining the second lane line.
- the second lane line is drawn in the area closest to the furthest distance from the edge of the obstacle, it is also possible to have the second lane line with a shorter length, helping to direct the vehicle to travel the shorter distance as quickly as possible. Avoid obstacles and improve the vehicle's obstacle avoidance efficiency.
- the lane line marking device selects at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, Including: the lane line marking device finds the first position point farthest from the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle area included in the target obstacle avoidance area, and determines the distance to the first position point in the target obstacle avoidance area is the second position point of the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the second position point is used as a control point.
- the connecting line between the second position point and the first position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersection points of the first lane line and the obstacle.
- the critical point of the lane line by taking the critical point of the lane line as the control point, helps to draw the critical lane line that can just achieve the ability to avoid obstacles.
- the lane line marking device selects at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance , including: the lane line marking device finds the third position point closest to the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle, and determines that the distance to the third position point in the target obstacle avoidance area is the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the fourth position point is used as a control point.
- the connection line between the fourth position point and the third position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent line of the obstacle at the third position point.
- the critical point of the lane line by taking the critical point of the lane line as the control point, helps to draw the critical lane line that can just achieve the ability to avoid obstacles.
- the lane line marking device determines the control points according to the above design, it can also draw control lines from the control points in a direction perpendicular to the connecting line, and select from the control lines on both sides of the control point.
- the at least two fifth position points are used as at least two control points. In this way, by taking the critical point of the lane line as the benchmark to obtain the safer control point outside the critical point, it is helpful to draw the obstacle avoidance lane line with a certain safety margin and improve the safety performance of the marked lane line.
- the at least two control points may include at least one of the following: the intersection of the control line and the incoming line is used as one control point, the intersection of the control line and the outgoing line is used as another control point, Among them, the entry line is the straight line drawn from the entry point along the entry direction, and the exit line is the straight line drawn from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit; the distance between the control line and the control point is equal to the first lane
- the two points of the line segment length between the two intersection points of the line and the obstacle are used as the two control points; the two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle are used as the control points.
- the lane marking device can determine the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point in the following manner: if the current lane is a straight lane, the lane marking device can directly connect the entry point and the exit point to obtain the first lane line; if the current lane is a turning lane line, the lane marking device can first extend from the entry point along the entry direction to obtain the entry line, and from the exit point along the exit direction Extend in the opposite direction to get the exit line, and then determine the first lane line according to the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point.
- the lane line marking device can select different lane line determination methods according to different types of lanes, which helps to draw the lane lines that meet the current lane type more precisely.
- the present application provides a lane marking method, which is suitable for a lane marking device, and the lane marking device may be a device, device or chip with image processing capability, and may also be a vehicle.
- the method includes: the lane marking device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, and selects at least two control points in the intersection, according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points.
- the control point is to determine at least two first lane lines, the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different, and then determine the intersection with the intersection from the at least two first lane lines
- the minimum distance of the obstacles in the target first lane line is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the target first lane line is marked on the map.
- the lane marking device can be improved to directly select the target first lane line that can avoid obstacles in the intersection from the plurality of first lane lines.
- This design not only helps to improve the efficiency of lane marking, but also marks the first target lane with obstacle avoidance function on the map, which effectively improves the quality and efficiency of lane marking. accuracy.
- the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line.
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: The minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is the lane edge line not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance The sum of the spacing and the preset lane width; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance spacing and 1/2 times the preset Sum of lane widths.
- the preset obstacle avoidance distance is a real number greater than or equal to 0.
- the lane marking device selects at least two control points at the intersection, including: the lane marking device selects at least two control points in the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than a preset obstacle avoidance distance .
- the lane marking device selects at least two control points in the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than a preset obstacle avoidance distance .
- the lane line marking device determines, from the at least two first lane lines, a target first lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle in the intersection is not less than a preset obstacle avoidance distance, including: if If the obstacle is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, the lane line marking device selects the target first lane line from the first lane line located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle, so as to satisfy the obstacle avoidance indicated by the obstacle rule. If the obstacle is an obstacle that does not have the function of traffic regulation indication, select the target first lane line from at least two first lane lines. choose. Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the device for marking lane lines determines that the at least two first lane lines do not include the target first lane line whose minimum distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, it can also select the target first lane line from at least one of the first lane lines. Select the reference first lane line from the two first lane lines, select one of the areas on both sides of the reference first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select the distance from the obstacle within the target obstacle avoidance area.
- At least one control point less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance determines the second lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then Mark the second lane line on the map.
- the second lane line that can safely bypass the obstacles in the intersection is re-determined, which helps The second lane line with accurate obstacle avoidance ability is marked in the intersection of the map, which effectively improves the marking quality and marking efficiency of the lane line.
- the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising: an acquiring unit for acquiring the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection; Move the point to the first lane line of the exit point, where the first lane line intersects the obstacle in the intersection, or the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; selection unit, It is used to select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; determine The unit is also used to determine the second lane line according to the entry point, at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; the labeling unit is used for The second lane line is marked on the map.
- the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line.
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any one of the following: if the first lane line is the lane edge adjacent to the obstacle, then the first The minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is a lane edge not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance and the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0.
- the target obstacle avoidance area may satisfy at least one of the following conditions: the target obstacle avoidance area is located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic instruction function; In the case of no intersection, the target obstacle avoidance area does not contain obstacles; when the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area includes the area of the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line The smallest obstacle area; or, in the case where the first lane line intersects an obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area contains the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line obstacle area.
- the selection unit may find the first position point farthest from the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle area included in the target obstacle avoidance area , and determine a second position point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the first position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and use the second position point as a control point.
- the connecting line between the second position point and the first position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersection points of the first lane line and the obstacle.
- the selection unit can find the third position point closest to the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle, and locate it within the target obstacle avoidance area A fourth position point whose distance from the third position point is a preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined, and the fourth position point is used as a control point.
- the connection line between the fourth position point and the third position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent line of the obstacle at the third position point.
- the selection unit determines the control points according to the above design, it can also draw control lines from the control points in a direction perpendicular to the connection line, and select at least two Two fifth position points, at least two fifth position points are used as at least two control points.
- the at least two control points may include at least one of the following: the intersection of the control line and the incoming line is used as one control point, the intersection of the control line and the outgoing line is used as another control point, Among them, the entry line is the straight line drawn from the entry point along the entry direction, and the exit line is the straight line drawn from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit; the distance between the control line and the control point is equal to the first lane
- the two points of the line segment length between the two intersections of the line and the obstacle are regarded as two control points; or, the two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle are regarded as two control points. a control point.
- the determination unit may determine the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point by: if the current lane is a straight lane, the determination unit may directly connect the entry point and the exit point Obtain the first lane line; if the current lane is a turning lane line, the determination unit can extend from the entry point along the entry direction to obtain the entry line, and extend from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit direction to obtain the exit
- the first lane line is determined according to the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point.
- the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising: an acquisition unit for acquiring the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection; and a selection unit for selecting from the intersection at least two control points; a determining unit, configured to determine at least two first lane lines according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, and determine from the at least two first lane lines the intersection with the intersection in the intersection.
- the target first lane line with the minimum distance of the obstacle not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; wherein, the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different; the labeling unit is used for Mark the target first lane line on the map.
- the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line.
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: The minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is the lane edge line not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance The sum of the spacing and the preset lane width; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance spacing and 1/2 times the preset Sum of lane widths.
- the preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0.
- the selection unit may select at least two control points in the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the determining unit may select the target first lane line from the first lane lines located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle. Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the determining unit may select the target first lane line from the at least two first lane lines. Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the selection unit may also select from the at least two Select the reference first lane line from the first lane line, select one of the areas on both sides of the reference first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select the distance to the obstacle in the target obstacle avoidance area not less than the preset distance
- the determining unit can also determine the second lane line according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset avoidance point.
- the distance of the obstacle, the labeling unit can also mark the second lane line on the map.
- the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor, a transceiver and a memory, the processor is connected to the memory, the memory stores a computer program, and when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane line
- the labeling device executes: obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle exiting the intersection, determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, and the obstacles in the first lane line and the intersection When the object intersects, or the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, the first lane line is not marked on the map, but is selected from the areas on both sides of the first lane line.
- One side area is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, and within the target obstacle avoidance area, at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected. According to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, It is determined that the minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance second lane line, and the second lane line is marked on the map.
- the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line.
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any one of the following: if the first lane line is the lane edge adjacent to the obstacle, then the first The minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is a lane edge not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance and the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0.
- the target obstacle avoidance area may satisfy at least one of the following conditions: the target obstacle avoidance area is located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic instruction function; In the case of no intersection, the target obstacle avoidance area does not contain obstacles; when the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area includes the area of the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line The smallest obstacle area; or, in the case where the first lane line intersects an obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area contains the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line obstacle area.
- the device for marking lane lines is made to specifically execute: when the first lane line intersects the obstacle, select the obstacle from the obstacle contained in the target obstacle avoidance area. Find the first position point farthest from the first lane line on the edge of the area, and determine the second position point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the first position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance. The location point acts as a control point.
- the connecting line between the second position point and the first position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersection points of the first lane line and the obstacle.
- the lane line marking device when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane line marking device is specifically executed: when the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, find the distance from the edge of the obstacle to the The third position point closest to a lane line, and a fourth position point whose distance from the third position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined in the target obstacle avoidance area, and the fourth position point is used as a control point.
- the connection line between the fourth position point and the third position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent line of the obstacle at the third position point.
- the computer program stored in the memory when executed by the processor, after the lane marking device determines the control point according to the above design, it also executes: drawing from the control point in a direction perpendicular to the connecting line A control line is selected, and at least two fifth position points respectively located on both sides of the control point are selected from the control line, and the at least two fifth position points are used as the at least two control points.
- the at least two control points may include at least one of the following: the intersection of the control line and the incoming line is used as one control point, the intersection of the control line and the outgoing line is used as another control point, Among them, the entry line is the straight line drawn from the entry point along the entry direction, and the exit line is the straight line drawn from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit; the distance between the control line and the control point is equal to the first lane
- the two points of the line segment length between the two intersection points of the line and the obstacle are used as the two control points; the two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle are used as the control points.
- the device for marking lane lines determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point in the following manner: if the current lane is straight If the current lane is a turning lane, first extend the entry point along the entry direction to obtain the entry line, and extend along the entry direction from the exit point to obtain the first lane line. The exit line is extended in the opposite direction of the exit direction, and then the first lane line is determined according to the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point.
- the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor, a transceiver and a memory, the processor is connected to the memory, the memory stores a computer program, and when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane line
- the labeling device executes: obtaining the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, selecting at least two control points in the intersection, and determining the entry point, exit point and at least two control points according to the entry point, exit point and at least two control points.
- At least two first lane lines any two of the at least two first lane lines use different control points, and then determine from the at least two first lane lines with obstacles in the intersection
- the minimum distance of the target first lane line is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the target first lane line is marked on the map.
- the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line.
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: The minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is the lane edge line not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance The sum of the spacing and the preset lane width; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance spacing and 1/2 times the preset Sum of lane widths.
- the preset obstacle avoidance distance is a real number greater than or equal to 0.
- the lane marking device when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane marking device is made to specifically execute: selecting at least two controls at the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance point.
- the device for marking lane lines is specifically executed: if the obstacle is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, then the target located at the target indicated by the obstacle will be executed.
- the target first lane line is selected from the first lane lines in the obstacle avoidance area; if the obstacle is an obstacle without the function of traffic regulation indication, the target first lane line is selected from at least two first lane lines.
- the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the device for marking lane lines can also be executed: if it is determined that the minimum distance from the obstacle not included in the at least two first lane lines is not less than If the target first lane line of the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected, the reference first lane line is selected from at least two first lane lines, and one of the areas on both sides of the reference first lane line is selected as the target obstacle avoidance In the target obstacle avoidance area, select at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and determine the minimum distance from the obstacle according to the entry point, at least one control point and exit point. The second lane line whose distance is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then the second lane line is marked on the map.
- the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a communication interface, where the communication interface is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the lane marking device and transmit to the processor or transfer signals from the processor.
- the signal is sent to other communication devices other than the lane marking device; the processor is used to implement the method according to any one of the designs of the first aspect above through a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
- the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the lane marking device and transmit to the processor or transfer signals from the processor.
- the signal is sent to other communication devices other than the lane marking device; the processor is used to implement the method according to any one of the designs of the second aspect above through a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
- the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device for marking lane lines performs as follows: The method described in any one of the designs of the first aspect above.
- the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device for marking lane lines performs the following: The method described in any one of the above-mentioned second aspects.
- the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a memory, the memory stores computer program instructions, and the processor executes the computer program instructions to implement the method described in any one of the designs of the first aspect above.
- the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a memory, the memory stores computer program instructions, and the processor executes the computer program instructions to implement the method described in any one of the designs of the second aspect above.
- the present application provides a vehicle. After the vehicle collects an image of the environment, a point cloud map is constructed, and lane lines are marked on the point cloud map according to the method described in any one of the first aspect or the second aspect above. .
- the present application provides an Internet of Vehicles system, including a vehicle and a mapping device, the vehicle collects an environmental image and sends it to the mapping device, and the mapping device uses the environmental image to construct a point cloud map, and according to the above-mentioned first aspect or second The method of any one of the aspects annotates lane lines on a point cloud map.
- the present application provides a chip, which may include a processor and an interface, where the processor is configured to read instructions through the interface, so as to execute the method described in any one of the designs of the first aspect above, or execute the method described in the first aspect.
- a chip which may include a processor and an interface, where the processor is configured to read instructions through the interface, so as to execute the method described in any one of the designs of the first aspect above, or execute the method described in the first aspect.
- the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of the designs of the first aspect above is implemented. , or implement the method described in any one of the designs of the second aspect above.
- the present application provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a processor, implements the method described in any one of the designs in the above first aspect, or implements the above second aspect The method described in any of the designs.
- FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable;
- FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application
- FIG. 3 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of an intersection situation of an entry point and an exit point provided by an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application
- FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a drawing of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application
- FIG. 7 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a drawing of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 8 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 9 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 11 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 12 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a lane marking device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 13 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another lane marking device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the lane marking scheme in this embodiment of the present application can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles, such as vehicle-to-everything (V2X), long term evolution-vehicle (LTE-V), Vehicle-vehicle (vehicle-vehicle, V2V), etc.
- V2X vehicle-to-everything
- LTE-V long term evolution-vehicle
- V2V Vehicle-vehicle
- the other devices include but are not limited to: on-board terminals, on-board controllers, on-board modules, on-board modules, on-board components, on-board chips, on-board units, on-board radars or on-board cameras and other sensors.
- the lane marking solution in the embodiment of the present application can also be used in other intelligent terminals with lane marking function other than vehicles, or set in other intelligent terminals with lane marking function other than vehicles, Or set in a component of the smart terminal.
- the intelligent terminal may be other terminal equipment such as intelligent transportation equipment, smart home equipment, and robots.
- a smart terminal or other sensors such as a controller, a chip, a radar or a camera, and other components in the smart terminal.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a possible system architecture to which the embodiment of the application is applied.
- the system architecture shown in FIG. 1 includes a collection vehicle 110 and a drawing device 120 .
- the collection vehicle 110 refers to a vehicle with an image collection function, and the image collection function can be realized by a sensor component such as a vehicle-mounted camera or a vehicle-mounted radar set on the vehicle.
- the drawing device 120 may refer to an apparatus, device or chip with image processing functions, such as a physical device such as a host or a processor, a virtual device such as a virtual machine or a container, and a chip or an integrated circuit.
- the acquisition vehicle 110 autonomously completes the entire process of image acquisition and map making.
- the mapping device 120 can usually be a server of the Internet of Vehicles, also known as a cloud server, cloud, cloud, cloud server or cloud controller, etc.
- the Internet of Vehicles server can be a single server, or can be composed of multiple servers
- the server cluster is not limited.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of the collection vehicles 110 and the number of the drawing devices 120 in the system architecture.
- one mapping device 120 can be connected to multiple collection vehicles 110 at the same time (for example, as shown in FIG. 1 , it can be connected to three collection vehicles 110 at the same time), so that the mapping device 120 can utilize different loop data collected by multiple collection vehicles 110 in parallel. Efficiently create global high-precision maps.
- the system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable may also include other devices, such as core network devices, wireless relay devices, and wireless backhaul devices, etc., which is implemented in this application. Examples are not limited.
- the drawing device 120 in the embodiment of the present application may integrate all functions on an independent physical device, and may also deploy different functions on a plurality of independent physical devices, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. .
- the mapping device 120 may jointly collect the vehicle 110 to make a high-precision map for guiding the passing of the vehicle.
- the surveying and mapping personnel first drive or remotely control the collection vehicle 110 to drive along various loops in the city, and the collection vehicle 110 calls the vehicle-mounted camera to capture the surrounding environment during driving to obtain camera data, and calls the lidar to perceive the surrounding environment to obtain lidar. data, the camera data and the lidar data are reported to the mapping device 120 together.
- the mapping device 120 projects the camera data onto the lidar data, uses the lidar data to refine to remove outliers in the camera data due to meteorological information such as light, and then uses a three-dimensional modeling algorithm to combine the processed camera data to construct a point cloud Map, and then mark the structured information of traffic entities such as lanes, traffic signs, traffic lights, and virtual lane lines on the point cloud map to obtain a high-precision map.
- the virtual lane line marked on the point cloud map may include one or both of the two edge lines of the lane, or may include a line between and parallel to the two edge lines of the lane, such as the centerline.
- the drawing device 120 In an automatic marking scheme of lane lines, the drawing device 120 first calls the drawing software to automatically mark the lane lines according to the entry point and exit point on the point cloud map, and then displays it to the adjustment personnel for inspection. When the lane line and the obstacle intersect, artificially adjust the lane line to not intersect. It can be seen that although this automatic labeling scheme can label accurate lane lines, at least two steps of drawing software labeling and manual adjustment need to be performed before labeling, which is not conducive to improving the efficiency of lane line labeling. That is to say, this automatic labeling scheme cannot take into account the labeling efficiency and labeling quality of lane lines at the same time.
- the lane line marking method in the embodiment of the present application is used to automatically mark the lane line that can directly avoid the obstacles in the intersection in the intersection of the point cloud map, without manual participation, so as to take into account the marking efficiency of the lane line and the Label quality.
- the present application will be described in further detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be understood that the specific operation methods in the method embodiments may also be applied to the apparatus embodiments or the system embodiments. It should be noted that, in the description of this application, "at least one" refers to one or more, wherein, a plurality refers to two or more. In view of this, in the embodiments of the present application, "a plurality” may also be understood as “at least two”.
- first and second are only used for the purpose of distinguishing and describing, and cannot be construed as indicating or implying relative importance.
- first lane line is the lane line to be determined
- second lane line is the re-determined lane line when the distance between the first lane line and the obstacle does not meet the preset obstacle avoidance distance
- these two lane lines are only two lane lines determined successively in the process of marking the lane lines, and cannot be understood as the difference in the priority or importance of the two lane lines.
- fitting refers to connecting a series of points on the plane with a smooth curve
- commonly used fitting methods include but are not limited to: least squares curve fitting method, polynomial curve fitting method , interpolation curve fitting method, Bezier curve fitting method or spline curve fitting method, etc.
- FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application, and the method is applicable to a drawing device, such as the drawing device 120 shown in FIG. 1 .
- the process includes the following steps:
- Step 201 the mapping device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection.
- the entry point and the exit point may be specific to the intersection.
- FIG. 3 exemplarily shows several possible situations of the entry point and the exit point provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the current intersection is a cross-type intersection
- the entry point I can be the entry point where the collection vehicle enters the cross-type intersection
- the exit point can be the point where the collection vehicle leaves the cross-type intersection.
- the exit point for example, can go straight to the exit point O 1 , or it can be the left-turn exit point O 2 , or it can be the right-turn exit point O 3
- the current intersection is a Y-shaped intersection.
- the entry point can be the entry point where the collected vehicle enters the Y-shaped intersection, for example, it can be the entry point I 1 on the left side branch of the Y shape, or it can be the entry point I 2 on the right side branch of the Y shape.
- the exit point O may be the exit point at which the collection vehicle drives out of the Y-shaped intersection; or, as shown in (C) in FIG. 3 , the current intersection is an L-shaped intersection, and the entry point I may be the collection vehicle entering the L-shaped intersection.
- the entry point of the junction, the exit point O can be the exit point of the collected vehicle exiting the L-shaped junction; or, as shown in (D) in Figure 3, the current junction is a T-shaped junction, and the entry point I can be the entry point where the vehicle enters the T-shaped intersection, and the exit point can be the exit point where the vehicle drives out of the T-shaped intersection, for example, it can be the straight exit point O 1 , or the exit point of turning right O 3 ; Or, as shown in (E) in FIG.
- the current intersection is a Z-shaped intersection
- the entry point I can be the entry point of the collection vehicle entering the Z-shaped intersection
- the exit point O can be collected
- the vehicle exits the exit point of the Z-shaped intersection; or, as shown in (F) in Figure 3, the current intersection is a 180° sharp turn intersection, and the entry point I can be the collection vehicle entering the 180° sharp turn intersection.
- the entry point of , and the exit point O can be the exit point of the collecting vehicle exiting the 180° sharp turn intersection. It should be understood that there are many possible situations of the entry point and the exit point in different intersection scenarios, which will not be listed here.
- Step 202 the mapping device determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point.
- the first lane line may correspond to one of the lane edges on both sides, or may correspond to any one of the lane lines in the area formed by the lane edge lines on both sides, such as the lane center line.
- the mapping device may determine one or more first lane lines according to the entry point and the exit point, and each of the one or more first lane lines may be determined in the following manner:
- Method 1 When the exit direction coincides with the entry direction, the current lane may be the straight lane at the intersection as shown in (A) in Figure 3 or (D) in Figure 3, and the mapping device can directly connect the entry point and Exit point to obtain the first lane line, the first lane line at this time is a straight lane line.
- the current lane may be a right turn sharp turn lane as shown in (E) in Figure 3, or a left turn as shown in (F) in Figure 3
- the drawing equipment can directly connect the entry point and the exit point through a straight line or a curve to obtain the first lane line, and the first lane line at this time is a straight lane line or a curved lane line.
- the entry point and the exit point in a straight line may make the first lane line intersect the lane boundary, rendering the first lane line unavailable, it is preferable to connect the entry point and the exit point by a curve located inside the lane. Exit point to reduce the probability that the first lane line intersects the lane boundary.
- the current lane may be as shown in Figure 3 (A), Figure 3 (B), or Figure 3 (C) or Figure 3 (D) Indicated left-turn lane or right-turn lane, the vehicle turns left or right in the current lane. Taking the left-turn scene at an intersection as shown in (A) in FIG.
- the drawing device can first extend from the entry point I along the entry direction to obtain a virtual entry line (L 1 ), and from the exit point O 2 Extend along the opposite direction of the exit direction to obtain the virtual exit line (L 2 ), determine the intersection (P) of the virtual entry line L 1 and the virtual exit line L 2 , and then according to the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point Out of point O 2 , the first lane line is obtained by fitting.
- the fitting method includes but is not limited to: randomly drawing a straight line or curve in the area formed by the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point O 2 ; drawing according to the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point O 2 Second-order Bezier curve or second-order spline curve; randomly select W control points in the area formed by the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point O 2 , according to the entry point I, W control points and Drive out point O 2 to draw a Bezier curve of order W+1 or a spline curve of order W+1, where W is a positive integer.
- the W control points may be selected as far as possible outside the obstacle, so as to increase the probability that the first lane line does not intersect the obstacle.
- Step 203 The mapping device determines whether the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle in the intersection is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the mapping device may calculate the minimum distance between each of the determined one or more first lane lines and the obstacle, when there is at least one of the one or more first lane lines.
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, it means that there is a target first lane line that can safely avoid the obstacle in one or more first lane lines, so the mapping equipment can Mark the target first lane line on the map in the following manner in step 206, when the distance between all the first lane lines in one or more first lane lines and the obstacle is not greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance , it means that one or more of the first lane lines cannot safely avoid obstacles, so the mapping device can re-determine the second lane lines that can safely avoid obstacles according to the following steps 204 to 205 .
- the minimum distance between a first lane line and an obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and may include any one of the following: when the first lane line is a lane close to the obstacle When the edge (also called the critical edge), the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance; when the first lane line is the lane edge on the side away from the obstacle, the first lane The minimum distance between the line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the sum of the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance and the preset lane width; when the first lane line is the lane centerline, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to The sum of the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance and 1/2 times the preset lane width.
- the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is used to indicate the minimum distance between the vehicle and the obstacle during driving, and can be set to a value greater than or equal to 0.
- the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is 0, that is, the map requires that the driving area does not intersect with obstacles.
- the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is greater than 0, that is, the map not only requires that the driving area and obstacles do not intersect, but also requires that the critical edge of the driving area and obstacles are separated by a certain safe distance.
- the minimum distance between a first lane line and an obstacle is not greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: In the case where the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is 0 The first lane line intersects the obstacle; or when the preset obstacle avoidance distance is greater than 0, the first lane line intersects the obstacle, or the first lane line does not intersect the obstacle but the first lane line and The minimum distance of obstacles is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the minimum distance between the left lane edge and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 780 cm (ie 30 cm + 750 cm), if the first left lane to be determined If the sideline intersects with the obstacle, or the distance from the obstacle is less than 780cm, the sideline of the second left lane needs to be re-determined; the minimum distance between the center lane line and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 405cm (ie 30cm+750/2 cm), if the first center lane line to be determined intersects with the obstacle, or the distance from the obstacle is less than 405 cm, the second center lane line needs to be re-determined.
- the left lane edge of the left turn lane is the critical edge, that is, the minimum distance between the left lane edge and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 30 cm. If the left lane edge intersects the obstacle, or the distance to the obstacle is less than 30 cm, the second left lane edge needs to be re-determined; the minimum distance between the right lane edge and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 780 cm (that is, 30 cm).
- the second right lane edge needs to be re-determined; the minimum distance between the center lane line and the obstacle Should be greater than or equal to 405 cm (ie 30 cm + 750/2 cm), if the first center lane line to be determined intersects with the obstacle, or the distance from the obstacle is less than 405 cm, the second center lane line needs to be re-determined .
- Step 204 the drawing device selects one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and selects at least one control in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the second lane line is determined according to the entry point, at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the target obstacle avoidance area may be randomly selected from the areas on both sides of the first lane line, or may be the side farther away from the obstacle in the areas on both sides of the first lane line, so as to be able to avoid obstacles in the first lane
- the side to which the line is deviated can quickly determine the second lane line again.
- it can also be indicated by an obstacle, which is not limited in detail.
- the mapping device may further offset the first lane line toward a certain side area of the first lane line, until the minimum distance between the offset first lane line and the obstacle is not less than a predetermined distance.
- the first lane line after the offset is used as the second lane line.
- offsetting the first lane line may refer to offsetting the entire first lane line between the entry point and the exit point, or it may refer to only offsetting the intersecting or distance less than the obstacle on the first lane line
- the part of the first lane line of the preset obstacle avoidance distance is not specifically limited.
- Step 205 the mapping device marks the second lane line on the map.
- the mapping device may further determine other lane edges or lane center lines other than the second lane line according to the preset lane width, and map the second lane line, the other lane edges and the lane to the lane line. Centerlines are marked on the map. For example, continuing to refer to (A) in FIG. 3 , assuming that the second lane line is the center line of the lane, after determining the second lane line, the drawing device can also move the second lane line to the left of the second lane line.
- the drawing device may also shift one or more control points to the left by 1/2 times the preset lane width to obtain the left
- One or more control points corresponding to the side lane edge is obtained by fitting the entry point, one or more control points and exit points corresponding to the left lane line, and the one or more control points are fitted to the left lane edge.
- One or more control points corresponding to the edge of the right lane are determined by shifting the preset lane width by 1/2 times to the right. Combined to get the right lane edge, mark the first lane edge, left lane edge and right lane edge on the map.
- Step 206 the mapping device marks the first lane line on the map.
- the mapping device when the minimum distance between at least two of the first lane lines and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance among the one or more first lane lines determined by the mapping device, the mapping device One of the at least two first lane lines can be selected randomly or according to certain rules as the target first lane line.
- the first lane line, the other lane edges and the lane center line are marked on the map together.
- the second lane line of the obstacle avoidance ability does not need to rely on manual labeling, nor does it require manual secondary adjustment, which can effectively improve the labeling quality and labeling efficiency of the lane line.
- a control point whose distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected as the determination of the first lane line in one side area of the first lane line.
- the benchmark of the second lane line can also improve the probability of determining the second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance distance requirement, and improve the success rate of marking the lane line.
- the above-mentioned first embodiment is only described by taking a common obstacle as an example.
- the obstacle may also be an obstacle with a traffic regulation indication function, and the obstacle with a traffic regulation indication function instructs the vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area. That is to say, the lane line marked on the map also needs to be located on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the mapping device can also complete the lane marking scheme in the first embodiment above in combination with the type of obstacles, and the specific implementation process includes any of the following:
- the mapping equipment first identifies the type of the obstacle. If it is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, then: determine the first lane line on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic regulation indication function. When the line intersects with the obstacle or the minimum distance to the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, re-determine the second lane with the minimum distance to the obstacle greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area Line, and mark the second lane line on the map; when the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, directly mark the first lane line on the map.
- Option 2 The mapping equipment first randomly fits the first lane line, and then identifies the type of the obstacle. If it is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, then: determine whether the first lane line is located on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area and is in line with the obstacle. If the minimum distance is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if so, mark the first lane line on the map; The second lane line of the obstacle avoidance distance, and mark the second lane line on the map.
- FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application, and the method is applicable to a drawing device, such as the drawing device 120 shown in FIG. 1 .
- the process includes the following steps:
- Step 401 the mapping device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection.
- Step 402 the mapping device selects at least two control points in the intersection, and determines Q first lane lines moving from the entry point to the exit point according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, where Q is: An integer greater than or equal to 2, any two of the Q first lane lines use different control points.
- the mapping device may randomly select Q control points from the intersection, and draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the entry point, each of the Q control points, and the exit point, to get Q first lane lines.
- the first lane line required by the preset obstacle avoidance distance improves the efficiency of lane marking.
- the Q first lane lines evenly distributed in the areas on both sides of the obstacle to improve the distance from the Q first lane lines.
- the probability of selecting the target first lane line that satisfies the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by any type of obstacles reduces the probability of re-determining the second lane line, and further improves the labeling efficiency of the lane line.
- FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a drawing of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the left-turn lane line in this example corresponds to the right side of the left-turn lane lane edge.
- the drawing device may first draw a virtual drive-in line L 1 along the drive-in direction from the drive-in point I, draw a virtual drive-in line L 2 from the drive-out point O along the opposite direction of the drive-out direction, and draw the virtual drive-in line L 2 along the opposite direction of the drive-out direction from the drive-in point O.
- the intersection P of the incoming line L 1 and the virtual outgoing line L 2 is used as a control point, and the first lane line K 11 is obtained by drawing according to the incoming point I, the control point P and the outgoing point O.
- the drawing device can randomly select control points from both sides of the first lane line K 11 to draw other first lane lines, for example, randomly select three control points from the left side of the first lane line K 11 , according to the entry point I, The three control points and the exit point O are drawn respectively to obtain the first lane line K 12 , the first lane line K 13 and the first lane line K 14 , and two control points are randomly selected from the right side of the first lane line K 11 , and draw the first lane line K 15 and the first lane line K 16 according to the entry point I, the two control points and the exit point O, respectively. So far, the drawing equipment has drawn a total of 6 first lane lines K 11 to K 16 .
- Step 403 the mapping device determines the type of obstacles in the intersection:
- step 404 If the obstacle in the intersection is an obstacle with a traffic regulation indication function, go to step 404;
- step 405 is executed.
- Step 404 the mapping device determines whether there is a target first lane line whose minimum distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic regulation indication function, and the target first lane line belongs to the target obstacle avoidance area. There are Q first lane lines, if yes, go to step 406 , if not, go to step 407 .
- the obstacles having the function of traffic regulation indication may include, for example, traffic circles, guard boxes, circular circles, roundabouts, and the like.
- a traffic circle usually instructs a vehicle to turn left to turn left on the left side of the traffic circle, and a vehicle to turn right to turn right on the right side of the traffic circle: if the first lane line corresponds to the left-turn lane line, the mapping device The first lane line located on the left side of the obstacle and the minimum distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance can be selected from the Q first lane lines as the target first lane line; if the first lane line corresponds to For the right-turn lane line, the mapping device can select the first lane line on the right side of the obstacle and the minimum distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance from the Q first lane lines, as the target first.
- the roundabout instructs the vehicle to go around the roundabout in one direction in a counterclockwise direction to the exit, so no matter whether the first lane line is the left-turn lane line, the right-turn lane line or the straight lane line, the mapping equipment needs to start from the Q-th From a lane line, the first lane line located on the right side of the obstacle and the minimum distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected as the target first lane line.
- the first lane line K 11 , the first lane line K 12 and the first lane line K 15 all intersect with obstacles, and the three first lane lines K 11 , K 12 and K 15 all intersect with obstacles.
- the minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle must be smaller than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, so the mapping equipment can exclude these three lane lines first.
- the first lane line K 13 and the first lane line K 14 are located on the left side of the obstacle, and the first lane line K 16 is located on the right side of the obstacle, assuming that the first lane line K 13 is connected to the obstacle
- the minimum distance of the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the minimum distance between the first lane line K 14 and the first lane line K 16 and the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, then: when the obstacle is a traffic circle, Since the first lane line is a left-turn lane line, the mapping device can select from the first lane line K 13 and the first lane line K 14 located on the left side of the obstacle that the minimum distance to the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance The first lane line K 14 of the distance is used as the target first lane line; when the obstacle is a roundabout, the mapping device can set the first lane line on the right side of the obstacle and the minimum distance to the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- Step 405 the mapping device determines whether there is a target first lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance in the Q first lane lines, if yes, go to step 406, if not, go to step 407 .
- the obstacles that do not have the function of traffic regulations may include, for example, ordinary obstacles that hinder the driving of vehicles, central circles that prohibit vehicles from driving, road markings or high-speed fences, etc. It is enough to bypass these obstacles, regardless of the direction of the bypass.
- the drawing device can first exclude the first lane lines K 11 , K 12 and K 15 that intersect with the obstacle, and then calculate the remaining three first lane lines K 13 , K respectively.
- the mapping equipment can be from the first lane line K 14 and the first lane line. Select the target first lane line in K 16 .
- Step 406 the mapping device marks the target first lane line on the map.
- the mapping equipment can also translate the first lane line K 14 to the left by the preset lane width to obtain the left lane edge of the left-turn lane (not shown in Figure 5), and then set the The left lane edge and the first lane line K 14 are marked on the map.
- the mapping device may also determine the center lane line of the left-turn lane according to the left lane edge and the first lane line K 14 , and mark the left lane edge, the first lane line K 14 and the center lane line on the map superior.
- the mapping device may select a suitable first lane line from the at least two first lane lines as the target first lane line.
- the selection methods include but are not limited to: selecting the first lane with the shortest distance, so that the vehicle can bypass the obstacle as soon as possible; The risk of colliding with obstacles in the process of avoiding obstacles; select the first lane line closest to the obstacle to reduce the probability of the vehicle colliding with the vehicle on the same side or the opposite side in the process of bypassing the obstacle; randomly select a first lane line Lane lines; select one of the first lane lines in the middle, etc. It should be understood that the present application is not limited to only adopting the above several selection methods, and in actual operation, the drawing device can also decide which selection method to adopt according to specific traffic conditions.
- the mapping device can also try to select the first lane line on the right side of the obstacle as the second lane line, so as to reduce the collision between the vehicle and the opposite lane during the left turn process.
- the probability of side-traveling vehicle collision is improved, and the safety of left turns is improved.
- Step 407 the mapping device re-determines the second lane line, and marks the second lane line on the map, wherein the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the mapping device can Any one of the first lane lines is used as the reference first lane line, and the second lane line is re-determined depending on the reference first lane line.
- the reference first lane line can try to select a first lane line that is not in bad condition, so as to improve the effective reference of the reference first lane line.
- the probability that the drawing device can directly select a target first lane line that meets the requirements from the plurality of first lane lines can be improved, and there is no need to re- Determining the second lane line not only helps to improve the efficiency of lane line marking, but also marks the target first lane line with obstacle avoidance function in the map, which effectively improves the quality and accuracy of lane line marking.
- the target first lane line marked on the map can also meet the obstacle avoidance requirements of the corresponding obstacles, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of map labeling.
- FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application, and the method is applicable to a drawing device, such as the drawing device 120 shown in FIG. 1 .
- the process includes the following steps:
- Step 601 the mapping device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection.
- Step 602 the mapping device determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point.
- FIG. 7 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a drawing flowchart of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the first lane line in this example corresponds to The right lane edge of the left turn lane.
- the drawing device may first draw a virtual entry line L 1 from the entry point I along the entry direction, and draw a virtual exit line L 2 from the exit point O along the opposite direction of the exit direction.
- Point I the intersection P of the virtual entry line L 1 and the virtual exit line L 2 , and the exit point O draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve to obtain the first lane line K 1 .
- the positional relationship between the first lane line K 1 and the obstacles may also be different.
- the obstacle J 2 shown in (B) is more to the left, which causes the same first lane line K 1 to intersect with the obstacle J 1 shown in (A) in FIG.
- the illustrated obstacle J2 does not intersect.
- Step 603 the mapping device determines the type of obstacles in the intersection:
- step 604 If the obstacle in the intersection is an obstacle that does not have the function of traffic regulation indication, go to step 604;
- step 606 is executed.
- Step 604 the mapping device determines whether the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if so, go to step 605 , if not, go to step 609 .
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which means: the first lane line intersects the obstacle, as shown in FIG. 7 shown in (A).
- the preset obstacle avoidance distance is greater than 0 (for example, 30cm)
- the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which means: the first lane line intersects the obstacle, as shown in Figure 7 ( A); or, the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle but the minimum distance is less than 30cm, as shown in (B) in Figure 7.
- Step 605 the drawing device selects one side of the area on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and then performs step 607 .
- the mapping device can select the target obstacle avoidance area in any of the following ways:
- Method 1 when the first lane line intersects with the obstacle, the first lane line will divide the obstacle into two obstacle areas, and the drawing device can select the area on both sides of the first lane line that is the same as the first lane line.
- the area where the obstacle area with the longest distance and the smallest distance of the lane line is located is used as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the implementation process is as follows: continue to refer to (A) in FIG. 7 , assuming that the left area of the first lane line K 1 is D 1 , the right area is D 2 , and the two areas between the first lane line K 1 and the obstacle J 1 are assumed to be D 1 .
- the intersection points are point E 1 and point E 2 , the first lane line K 1 divides obstacle J 1 into obstacle area S and obstacle area R, then the mapping device can first find the distance line segment on the edge of obstacle area S E 1 E 2 (In this paper, the line segment E 1 E 2 may refer to the part of the first lane line between the point E 1 and the point E 2 , or it may refer to the straight line obtained by connecting the point E 1 and the point E 2 segment, not specifically limited) the farthest point MS, assuming that the point MS and the vertical foot of the line segment E 1 E 2 are point F, then the farthest distance between the obstacle area S and the first lane line K 1 is the line segment M Length of SF.
- the drawing device can find the point MR farthest from the line segment E 1 E 2 on the edge of the obstacle area R , assuming that the point MR and the line segment E 1 E 2 are perpendicular to the point G, then, the obstacle area
- the farthest distance between R and the first lane line K 1 is the length of the line segment MR G. Since the length of the line segment M SF is less than the length of the line segment M R G, the obstacle area S is the target obstacle area with the smallest distance from the first lane line K 1 among the two obstacle areas. From the areas D 1 and D 2 on both sides of the first lane line K 1 , the side area D 1 where the target obstacle area S is located is selected as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the target obstacle avoidance area by using the side area where the obstacle area with the longest distance and the smallest distance from the first lane line is located as the target obstacle avoidance area, it can rely on the positional relationship between the first lane line and the obstacle, through a relatively A small deformation obtains the second lane line, which helps to reduce the difficulty of refitting the second lane line. Also, since the second lane line is drawn in the area closest to the furthest distance from the edge of the obstacle, it is also possible to have the second lane line with a shorter length, helping to direct the vehicle to travel the shorter distance as quickly as possible. Avoid obstacles and improve the vehicle's obstacle avoidance efficiency.
- Method 2 In the case where the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle but the minimum distance is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, the mapping device can use the area on both sides of the first lane line that does not contain obstacles as the target obstacle avoidance area, such as the area D 1 shown in (B) of FIG. 7 .
- the mapping device may also randomly select one side of the area on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, or may also use the obstacles included in the areas on both sides of the first lane line The area on the side with the smallest area of the object area is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, or different strategies can be adopted according to specific traffic scenarios.
- the mapping device can also take the area on the right side of the second lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area for marking on the map Exit the second lane line that avoids on the right side of the obstacle to reduce the probability of collision between the straight-going vehicle and the opposite-side straight-going vehicle.
- Step 606 the mapping device determines whether the first lane line is located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic regulation indication function and the minimum distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if not, then go to step 607 , if yes, go to step 609 .
- the current corresponds to a left-turn lane
- the traffic circle indicates that the vehicle to be turned left turns left on the left side of the traffic circle.
- the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the traffic circle is the area on the left side of the obstacle J1
- the first lane line K1 is not located in the area on the left side of the obstacle J1 but intersects the obstacle J1, so the first lane line K1
- the lane line K 1 is not located in the target obstacle avoidance area; and, the first lane line K 1 intersects with the obstacle J 1 , so the minimum distance between the first lane line K 1 and the obstacle J 1 is smaller than the preset obstacle avoidance distance , the mapping equipment needs to re-determine the second lane line.
- the current corresponding to the left-turn lane, the roundabout indicates that the vehicles all move counterclockwise to the exit position along the roundabout, so the target indicated by the roundabout is
- the obstacle avoidance area is the area on the right side of the obstacle J 2
- the first lane line K 1 is located on the left area of the obstacle J 2 , so the first lane line K 1 is not located in the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the first lane line K 1 does not intersect with the obstacle J 2 , and the mapping device also needs to re-determine the second lane line.
- Step 607 the mapping device selects at least one control point from the target obstacle avoidance area whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and obtains the first control point by fitting according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point. Two-lane line.
- the at least one control point may include one control point, and the drawing device draws a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the entry point, the one control point and the exit point, to obtain a second order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve.
- Lane line or, including at least two control points, the drawing device draws a higher-order Bezier curve or a higher-order spline curve according to the entry point, the at least two control points and the exit point to obtain the second lane line.
- the mapping device may first locate the target obstacle avoidance area. Find the point MS (ie, the first position point) that is farthest from the first lane line K 1 on the obstacle area S in the area D 1 , and find the foot F from the point MS to the first lane line K 1 .
- the point MS starts to extend the line segment MS F in the opposite direction to the point N (ie, the second position point), and the length of the line segment MS N is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the mapping device uses the point MS on the obstacle area S farthest from the first lane line K1 as a reference, and finds a point N whose distance from the obstacle J1 is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the drawing device can obtain the second lane line by fitting according to any of the following methods based on the entry point I, the point N and the exit point O:
- the drawing device can directly use the point N as a control point, and draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the entry point I, the control point N, and the exit point O to obtain the second lane line.
- the drawing device can draw a straight line L 3 (ie, a control line) perpendicular to the line segment FN from the point N to both sides.
- the straight line L 3 and the virtual approach line L The intersection point of 1 is C 1 (a fifth position point), and the intersection point with the virtual exit line L 2 is C 2 (another fifth position point).
- the drawing device can use point C 1 , point N and point C 2 as three control points, and obtain the second lane by fitting according to the entry point I, the control point C 1 , the control point N, the control point C 2 and the exit point O Wire.
- a fourth-order Bezier curve or a fourth-order spline curve can be drawn directly according to the entry point I, the control point C 1 , the control point N, the control point C 2 and the exit point O to obtain the second lane line.
- Draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve at entry point I, control point C 1 and control point N, as the first segment of the second lane line, according to control point N, control point C 2 and exit point O draws a second-order Bezier curve or second-order spline as the second segment of the second lane line.
- the drawing device can also select from the straight line L 3 two points V 1 and V 2 (two points V 1 and V 2 (two Fifth position point), take point V 1 , point N and point V 2 as three control points, draw fourth order according to entry point I, control point V 1 , control point N and control point V 2 and exit point O Bezier curve or fourth-order spline curve to get the second lane line, or draw second-order Bezier curve or second-order spline curve according to the entry point I, control point V 1 and control point N, as the second lane
- control point V 1 and the control point V 2 can be uniformly selected from both sides of the point N, that is, the length of the line segment V 1 N is guaranteed to be equal to the length of the line segment V 2 N, so that the drawing equipment can be based on the three control points with relatively uniform distribution. point to draw a smoother second lane line.
- the method of uniform selection may include, but is not limited to: selecting a point on the straight line segment L3 on the left side of the control point N whose distance from the control point N is exactly equal to the length of the line segment E 1 E 2 as the control point V 1 ; On the straight line segment L3 on the right side of the control point N, select a point whose distance from the control point N is exactly equal to the length of the line segment E 1 E 2 as the control point V 2 ; select the midpoint of the line segment NC 1 as the control point V 1 , and select the line segment NC The midpoint of 2 serves as the control point V 2 .
- other selection methods may also be adopted, which will not be listed one by one here.
- Mode 4 After selecting the control point V 1 and the control point V 2 on both sides of the point N according to the method in Mode 3, if the smoothness of the second lane line is not considered, it can also be determined according to the entry point I, the control point Draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve between C 1 and control point V 1 as the first segment of the second lane line, and take the line segment of control point V 1 , control point N and control point V 2 as the second segment For the second segment of the lane line, draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the control point V 2 , the control point C 2 and the exit point O, as the third segment of the second lane line. In this way, the second lane line in which the curve segment and the straight segment are combined can be obtained.
- the drawing device can first start from the obstacle J 2 , find the point M U (ie, the third position point) that is closest to the first lane line K 1 , and find the foot X from the point M U to the first lane line K 1 , and extend the line segment M in the opposite direction from the point M U U X to point N (ie, the fourth position point), and the length of the line segment M U N is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- the drawing device uses the point MU closest to the first lane line K 1 on the obstacle J 2 as the benchmark, and finds the point N whose distance from the obstacle J 2 is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then, The mapping device may obtain the second lane line by fitting according to any of the above methods based on the entry point I, the point N, and the exit point O.
- the drawing device may also select a distance from the extension line of the line segment FM S to the point MS that is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance
- the point (T in FIG. 7 ) is used as the control point N in the above four situations, and the second lane line is drawn according to one of the above four situations.
- the mapping device can also directly select the distance from the obstacle greater than or equal to the preset distance from the area formed by the entry point I, the control point MS and the exit point O at random.
- One or more control points of the obstacle avoidance distance draw a second lane line.
- Step 608 the mapping device marks the second lane line on the map.
- the currently determined second lane line corresponds to the right lane edge of the left-turn lane.
- at least one control point corresponding to the left lane edge is determined, and the left lane edge is drawn by using the entry point, at least one control point and exit point corresponding to the left lane edge.
- the preset lane width may refer to the width of the lane entering the lane or the width of the lane leaving the lane, or it may be a gradual transition from the width of the lane entering the lane to the width of the lane leaving the lane, so as to mark
- the rear lane line can be applied to the lane after the vehicle exits.
- Step 609 the mapping device marks the first lane line on the map.
- the probability of fitting the second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance distance requirement can be improved, and the success rate of marking the lane line can be improved.
- the second lane line can be located in the area corresponding to the obstacle as much as possible, effectively improving the accuracy of marking the lane line.
- FIG. 8 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the blank area in this example represents the intersection
- the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing
- this example can be seen as marking the left-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the illustration and exits the intersection from the top of the illustration.
- the drawing device may first draw a left-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 8 according to the entry point B 11 of the entry lane on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 21 of the exit lane above the illustration and draw a left turn as shown in (A) in FIG .
- the left lane edge L 12 of the lane is compared, and it is found that the right lane edge L 11 intersects the obstacle while the left lane edge L 12 does not intersect the obstacle.
- the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge in this case, Therefore, the drawing device can take the right lane edge L11 as the first lane line. Further, according to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L11 , the area of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L11 is larger than that of the obstacle located on the right side of the first lane line. The area of the area is small, so the mapping device determines the left area of the first lane line L11 as the target obstacle avoidance area, and selects the minimum distance from the obstacle from the left area of the first lane line L11 not less than the preset avoidance area. At least one control point (not shown in FIG.
- Point B 21 draws a second lane line L 21 as shown in FIG. 8(B) , and the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the right lane edge of the left-turn lane.
- this example can also be regarded as marking the right-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the top of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure.
- the drawing device may first draw a right-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 8 according to the entry point B 21 of the entry lane at the top of the illustration and the exit point B 11 of the exit lane at the left side of the illustration. and draw a right turn as shown in (A) in FIG .
- the right lane edge L 12 of the lane is compared and found that the left lane edge L 11 intersects the obstacle while the right lane edge L 12 does not intersect the obstacle, so the left lane edge L 11 can be used as the first lane line.
- the mapping device determines the area on the right side of the first lane line L11 as the target obstacle avoidance area, and selects the minimum distance to the obstacle from the area on the right side of the first lane line L11 not less than the preset obstacle avoidance area.
- At least one control point of the distance which is drawn according to the entry point B 21 of the entry lane at the top of the illustration, the at least one control point and the exit point B 11 of the exit lane on the left side of the illustration, as shown in (B) of FIG. 8 .
- the second lane line L 21 is illustrated, the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the left lane edge of the right-turn lane. Then, use at least one control point corresponding to the left lane edge L21 and the width of the entering lane or the width of the exiting lane to determine at least one control point corresponding to the right lane edge of the right-turn lane.
- the entry point B 22 entering the lane above, at least one control point corresponding to the edge of the right lane, and the exit point B 12 exiting the lane on the left side of the figure are drawn to draw the right side as shown in (B) in FIG. 8 Lane edge L 22 .
- the left lane edge L 21 and the right lane edge L 22 in this example can instruct the right-turning vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the right side of the obstacle.
- Fig. 9 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the blank area in this example represents the intersection
- the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing
- the center of the intersection There is a rectangular obstacle at the upper position:
- this example can be seen as marking the left-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the illustration and exits the intersection from the top of the illustration.
- the drawing device may first draw a left-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 9 according to the entry point B 11 of the entry lane on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 21 of the exit lane above the illustration and draw a left turn as shown in Fig.
- the drawing device can take the left lane edge L 12 as the first lane line. Further, according to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L12, the area of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12.
- the area of the obstacle area is small, so the mapping device determines the area on the right side of the first lane line L 12 as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the control point selected in the right area and the exit point B 22 of the exit lane above the illustration draw a second lane line L 22 as shown in (B) in FIG. 9 , and the second lane line L 22 corresponds to the left The left lane edge of the turn lane.
- use the control point corresponding to the left lane edge L22 and the preset lane width to determine the control point corresponding to the right lane edge of the left-turn lane, according to the entry point B11 of the left lane entering the lane.
- the control point corresponding to the side line of the right lane and the exit point B 21 of the exit lane above the figure draw the side line L 21 of the right side lane as shown in FIG. 9(B).
- the right lane edge L 21 and the left lane edge L 22 in this example can instruct the left-turn vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the right side of the obstacle.
- this example can also be regarded as marking the right-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the top of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure.
- the drawing device may first draw a right-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 9 according to the entry point B 21 of the entry lane at the top of the illustration and the exit point B 11 of the exit lane at the left side of the illustration. and draw a right turn as shown in (A) in FIG.
- the right lane edge L 12 of the lane is compared and found that the right lane edge L 12 intersects the obstacle and the left lane edge L 11 does not intersect the obstacle, so the right lane edge L 12 can be used as the first lane line.
- the area of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12.
- the area is small, so the drawing device determines the area on the left side of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the selected control point and the exit point B 12 of the left exit lane in the figure draw a second lane line L 22 as shown in (B) in FIG. 9 , and the second lane line L 22 corresponds to the right turn lane.
- Right lane edge use at least one control point corresponding to the right lane edge L22 and the preset lane width to determine the control point corresponding to the left lane edge of the right-turn lane, and drive into the lane according to the entry point B above the illustration 21.
- the left lane edge L 21 and the right lane edge L 22 in this example can instruct the right-turning vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the left side of the obstacle.
- FIG. 10 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the blank area represents the intersection
- the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing
- this example can be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating left-to-right travel, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the figure and exits the intersection from the right side of the figure.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 10 according to the entry point B11 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B21 on the right side of the illustration.
- the right lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 12 and the right exit point B 22 as shown in FIG. 10 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in FIG.
- the comparison shows that although the right lane edge L 11 and the left lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge.
- the maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the left obstacle is D 1 . If the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 12 is the critical edge, and the distance between the left lane edge L 12 and the right obstacle is The maximum distance is D 2 . Obviously, D 1 is greater than D 2 .
- the drawing equipment can take the left lane edge L 12 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L The right side of 12 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the second lane line L 221 shown in (B) of FIG. 10 corresponds to the left side lane line L 221 of the straight lane below , and is drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 10 ( B) Illustrated right lane edge L 21 of the lower straight lane.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 according to the entry point B 12 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 22 on the right side of the illustration
- the right lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 13 and the right exit point B 23 as shown in FIG. 10 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in FIG.
- the mapping device can take the right lane edge L12 as the first lane line.
- the mapping device determines the left area of the first lane line L 12 as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the control point selected in and the exit point B 22 of the exit lane on the right side of the illustration draws a second lane line as shown in (B) in FIG. 10 , and the second lane line L 222 corresponds to the right side of the upper straight lane.
- the left lane edge L 23 of the upper straight lane as shown in (B) in FIG. 10 is drawn according to the preset lane width.
- this example can also be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating driving from right to left, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the right side of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 according to the entry point B21 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B11 on the left side of the illustration.
- the left lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 22 and the illustrated left exit point B 12 to draw the right lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 .
- the comparison shows that although the left lane edge L 11 and the right lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge.
- the maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the obstacle on the right is D 1 . If the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the lane edge L 12 on the right is a critical edge, and the distance between the edge L 12 on the right lane and the obstacle on the left is The maximum distance is D 2 . Obviously, D 1 is greater than D 2 .
- the drawing equipment can take the right lane edge L 12 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L The left side of 12 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the drawing is as follows:
- the second lane line L 221 shown in (B) in FIG. 10 corresponds to the right lane edge L 221 of the straight lane below , which is then drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 10 ( B) Illustrated left lane edge L21 of the lower straight lane.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 10 according to the entry point B 22 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B 12 on the left side of the illustration
- the left lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 23 and the illustrated left exit point B 13 to draw the right lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 .
- the mapping device determines the area on the right side of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area.
- the control point selected in and the exit point B 12 of the left exit lane in the figure draws a second lane line as shown in (B) in FIG. 10 , and the second lane line L 222 corresponds to the left side of the upper straight lane.
- the side lane edge line, and then the right lane edge line L 23 of the upper straight lane as shown in FIG. 10 (B) is drawn according to the preset lane width.
- the above example enables vehicles in two adjacent straight lanes to avoid obstacles on either side of the obstacle.
- FIG. 11 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the blank area in this example represents the intersection
- the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing
- this example can be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating left-to-right travel, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the figure and exits the intersection from the right side of the figure.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 11 according to the entry point B11 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B21 on the right side of the illustration.
- the right lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 12 and the right exit point B 22 as shown in FIG. 11 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in FIG.
- the comparison shows that although the right lane edge L 11 and the left lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge.
- the maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the left obstacle is D 3 . If the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 12 is the critical edge, and the distance between the left lane edge L 12 and the right obstacle is The maximum distance is D 4 . Obviously, D 3 is smaller than D 4 .
- the drawing equipment can take the right lane edge L 11 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L
- the left area of 11 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, which is drawn according to the left entry point B 11 in the figure, the control point selected from the left area of the first lane line L 11 , and the right exit point B 21 in the figure.
- the second lane line L 21 as shown in FIG. 11(B), the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the right lane edge of the lower straight lane, and is drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 11(B). ), the left lane edge L 22 of the lower straight lane.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 11 according to the entry point B 12 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 22 on the right side of the illustration
- the right lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 13 and the right exit point B 23 as shown in FIG. 11 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in FIG.
- the mapping device can take the right lane edge L12 as the first lane line.
- the mapping device determines the left area of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. Since the lower through lane line adjacent to the upper through lane line is also on the left side of the obstacle, the right lane edge of the upper through lane line can directly refer to the already drawn left lane edge L 22 of the lower through lane.
- the drawing device can directly determine the control point corresponding to the left lane edge of the upper straight lane according to the control point and the preset lane width used in drawing the left lane edge L 22 , according to the left side of the illustration.
- the entry point B 13 of the entry lane, the determined control point, and the exit point B 23 of the illustrated right exit lane draw the left lane edge L of the upper straight lane as shown in FIG. 11(B) 23 .
- this example can also be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating driving from right to left, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the right side of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 11 according to the entry point B21 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B11 on the left side of the illustration.
- the left lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 22 and the illustrated left exit point B 12 to draw the right lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG.
- the comparison shows that although the left lane edge L 11 and the right lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge.
- the maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the obstacle on the right is D 3 . If the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the lane edge L 12 on the right is a critical edge, and the distance between the edge L 12 on the right lane and the obstacle on the left is The maximum distance is D 4 . Obviously, D 3 is smaller than D 4 .
- the drawing equipment can take the left lane edge L 11 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L
- the right area of 11 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, which is drawn according to the right entry point B 21 in the figure, the control point selected from the right area of the first lane line L 11 , and the left exit point B 11 in the figure.
- the second lane line L 21 as shown in FIG. 11(B), the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the left lane edge of the straight lane below, and is drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 11(B ). ), the right lane edge L 22 of the lower straight lane.
- the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 11 according to the entry point B 22 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B 12 on the left side of the illustration
- the left lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 23 and the illustrated left exit point B 13 to draw the right lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in (A) of FIG. 11 , it is found by comparison that the left lane edge L12 intersects the obstacle and the right lane edge L13 does not intersect the obstacle, so the drawing device can take the left lane edge L12 as the first lane line.
- the mapping device determines the area to the right of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. Since the lower through lane line adjacent to the upper through lane line is also on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge of the upper through lane line can directly refer to the drawn right lane edge L 22 of the lower through lane.
- the drawing equipment can directly determine the control point corresponding to the right lane edge of the upper straight lane according to the control point and the preset lane width used in drawing the right lane edge L 22 .
- the entry point B 23 of the entry lane, the determined control point, and the exit point B 13 of the left exit lane as shown in FIG. 11 draw the right lane edge L of the upper straight lane as shown in (B) of FIG. 11 23 .
- the above example enables vehicles in two adjacent through lanes to avoid an obstacle on the same side of the obstacle.
- intersections are just examples of several ways of marking obstacle avoidance lane lines at intersections. In actual traffic scenarios, there may be more intersections, which are not listed one by one in this application.
- the drawing device may directly select a point whose minimum distance to multiple obstacles is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance as a control point to draw the second lane line, or may first use a certain obstacle After drawing the second lane line based on the object, then judge whether the second lane line meets the obstacle avoidance requirements of other obstacles, mark the second lane line when it meets the requirements, and re-use the second lane line as the benchmark when it does not meet the requirements.
- the obstacle to be selected first may be randomly selected from multiple obstacles or sequentially selected in position order, or may be the one with the most severe positional relationship among the multiple obstacles, which is not specifically limited.
- each network element in the above-mentioned implementation includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
- the present invention can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of the present invention.
- FIG. 12 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a lane marking device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the device may be a drawing device, or a chip or a circuit, for example, it may be set in
- the chip or circuit in the drawing device can be, for example, the drawing device described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 3.
- the lane marking apparatus 1201 may include a processor 1202, a memory 1204 and a transceiver 1203, and may further include a bus system, wherein the processor 1202, the memory 1204 and the transceiver 1203 may be connected through the bus system.
- the above-mentioned processor 1202 may be a chip.
- the processor 1202 may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a system on chip (SoC). It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller). unit, MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- SoC system on chip
- SoC system on chip
- SoC system on chip
- MCU microcontroller
- MCU programmable logic device
- PLD programmable logic device
- each step of the above-mentioned method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1202 or an instruction in the form of software.
- the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor 1202 .
- the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
- the storage medium is located in the memory 1204, and the processor 1202 reads the information in the memory 1204, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
- processor 1202 in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
- each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
- the aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
- DSPs digital signal processors
- ASICs application specific integrated circuits
- FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
- the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed.
- a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
- the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
- the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
- the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
- the memory 1204 in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
- the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
- Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
- RAM random access memory
- DRAM dynamic random access memory
- SDRAM synchronous DRAM
- SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
- ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
- SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
- direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
- the lane marking apparatus 1201 corresponds to a drawing device
- the lane marking apparatus may include a processor 1202, a transceiver 1203 and a memory 1204.
- the memory 1204 is used for storing instructions
- the processor 1202 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 1204, so as to realize the drawing device in any one or any of the corresponding methods as shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 4 or FIG. 6 above. , or execute the method executed by the drawing device in any of the embodiments shown in the first embodiment to the third embodiment.
- the transceiver 1203 can receive the environmental image reported by the collected vehicle, and the processor 1202 can construct a point cloud map according to the environmental image, and obtain the vehicle entering the intersection on the point cloud map the entry point of the vehicle, and the exit point of the vehicle exiting the intersection, determine the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, where the first lane line intersects the obstacle in the intersection, or the first lane line and When the minimum distance between obstacles is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select the target obstacle avoidance area within the target obstacle avoidance area.
- At least one control point whose distance is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance determines the second lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance , and mark the second lane line on the map.
- the transceiver 1203 can receive the environmental image reported by the collected vehicle, and the processor 1202 can construct a point cloud map according to the environmental image, and obtain the vehicle entry on the point cloud map.
- the entry point of the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle exiting the intersection, at least two control points are selected in the intersection, and at least two first lane lines are determined according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, And the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different, and then it is determined from the at least two first lane lines that the minimum distance to the obstacle in the intersection is not less than the preset value.
- the target first lane line of the obstacle avoidance distance, and the target first lane line is marked on the map.
- FIG. 13 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another lane marking device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the lane marking device 1301 may be a drawing device, an exemplary The ground may be the drawing device described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, or may be a chip or a circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in the drawing device.
- the lane marking device can implement the steps performed by the drawing device in any one or more of the corresponding methods shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or FIG. A method performed by a drawing device in one embodiment.
- the lane marking device 1301 may include an acquiring unit 1302 , a determining unit 1303 , a selecting unit 1304 and a marking unit 1305 .
- the obtaining unit 1302 can obtain the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, and the determining unit 1303 is at the first lane line and the intersection.
- the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point can be determined, and the selection unit 1304 may select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, select at least one control point within the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and determine
- the unit 1303 can also determine the second lane line according to the entry point, at least one control point and the exit point. The minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then the labeling unit 1305 will use the map on the map. Mark the second lane line above.
- the obtaining unit 1302 can obtain the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, and the selection unit 1304 can select at least Two control points
- the determining unit 1303 may determine at least two first lane lines according to the entry point, exit point and at least two control points, and determine obstacles in the intersection from the at least two first lane lines
- the minimum distance of the object is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance of the target first lane line, wherein the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different. Mark the target first lane line on it.
- the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or The method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 .
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 2 and FIG. 4 . Or the method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 .
- the present application also provides a vehicle, the vehicle can collect an environment image, build a point cloud map based on the environment image, and then execute any one of the above shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or FIG. 6 . or any number of steps performed by the mapping device in the corresponding method to mark lane lines that can avoid obstacles on the point cloud map.
- the present application also provides an Internet of Vehicles system, which includes the aforementioned vehicle and a mapping device.
- the vehicle can collect an environment image and send it to the mapping device, and the mapping device can construct a point cloud map based on the environment image. And perform the steps performed by the mapping device in any one or more of the corresponding methods shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or FIG. 6 to mark the lane lines that can avoid obstacles on the point cloud map.
- the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- software When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
- the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
- the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media.
- the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, high-density digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state drives, SSD)) etc.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
- Remote Sensing (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Electromagnetism (AREA)
- Traffic Control Systems (AREA)
Abstract
A lane line labeling method and apparatus. The method comprises: acquiring a drive-in point of a vehicle driving into an intersection and a drive-out point of the vehicle driving out of the intersection; determining a first lane line for moving from the drive-in point to the drive-out point; and when the first lane line intersects with an obstacle in the intersection, or the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than a preset obstacle avoidance distance, not labeling the first lane line, but instead selecting an area on one side from areas on both sides of the first lane line as a target obstacle avoidance area, and within the target obstacle avoidance area, selecting at least one control point, the distance between which and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and determining and labeling, according to the drive-in point, the at least one control point and the drive-out point, a second lane line, the minimum distance between which and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, such that the labeling quality and labeling efficiency of lane lines are improved. Further disclosed is a second method, comprising: selecting at least two control points in an intersection; determining at least two first lane lines according to a drive-in point, a drive-out point and the at least two control points; and determining, from the at least two first lane lines, a target first lane line, the minimum distance between which and an obstacle in the intersection is not less than a preset obstacle avoidance distance. Further disclosed are a computer-readable storage medium, a computer program product, a vehicle, and an Internet of Vehicles system which include a lane line labeling method.
Description
相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
本申请要求在2021年04月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110484993.4、申请名称为“一种车道线标注方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202110484993.4 and the application title "A method and device for marking lane lines", which was submitted to the China Patent Office on April 30, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated into this application by reference middle.
本申请涉及车联网技术领域,尤其涉及一种车道线标注方法及装置。The present application relates to the technical field of Internet of Vehicles, and in particular, to a method and device for marking lane lines.
车联网领域中,高精地图在车辆定位、车辆导航甚至车辆的自动驾驶中起到至关重要的作用。高精地图通常采用如下方式制成:采集真实道路的周边环境信息,通过对周边环境信息进行融合处理得到点云地图,并在点云地图中标注出各种交通实体的结构化数据,以获得高精地图。其中,交通实体可以包括但不限于车道线、交通标志物或红绿灯等。车联网领域中的高精地图主要用于指导车辆的通行,而要达到较好的指导效果,则高精地图的精度至少要达到车道级别。也即是说,如何高效且准确地标注车道线,对于快速获得高质量的高精地图以便准确指导车辆的通行非常重要。In the field of Internet of Vehicles, high-precision maps play a vital role in vehicle positioning, vehicle navigation, and even automatic driving of vehicles. High-precision maps are usually made in the following ways: collect the surrounding environment information of real roads, obtain a point cloud map by fusing the surrounding environment information, and mark the structured data of various traffic entities in the point cloud map to obtain High-precision map. The traffic entities may include, but are not limited to, lane lines, traffic signs, or traffic lights. The high-precision map in the field of Internet of Vehicles is mainly used to guide the passage of vehicles, and to achieve a better guidance effect, the accuracy of the high-precision map must at least reach the lane level. That is to say, how to label lane lines efficiently and accurately is very important for quickly obtaining high-quality high-precision maps so as to accurately guide the passage of vehicles.
现有的车道线标注方法主要有两种:一是人工标注,主要依靠制图人员人眼判断点云地图中待标注车道的周边环境,根据判断结果人工标注虚拟曲线,但这种标注方式不仅费时费力,还不容易保证虚拟曲线的光滑度和美观度;二是自动标注,主要是使用已有的一些绘图软件自动绘制曲线,但绘图软件通常只考虑驶入点和驶出点,并不会考虑当前道路上是否存在障碍物,在这种情况下,绘图软件自动绘制的车道线很可能会与道路上的障碍物相交,导致该车道线不可用。由此可知,现有的两种车道线标注方法都无法高效且准确地标注车道线,不利于提高地图上车道线的标注效率和标注质量。There are two main ways to label the lane lines: one is manual labeling, which mainly relies on the human eye of the cartographer to judge the surrounding environment of the lane to be labelled in the point cloud map, and manually label the virtual curve according to the judgment result, but this labeling method is not only time-consuming. It is laborious, and it is not easy to ensure the smoothness and aesthetics of the virtual curve; the second is automatic labeling, mainly using some existing drawing software to automatically draw the curve, but the drawing software usually only considers the entry point and exit point, and does not Consider whether there are obstacles on the current road, in this case, the lane line drawn automatically by the drawing software is likely to intersect with the obstacles on the road, making the lane line unavailable. It can be seen that the existing two lane line labeling methods cannot efficiently and accurately label the lane lines, which is not conducive to improving the labeling efficiency and labeling quality of the lane lines on the map.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种车道线标注方法及装置,用以提高车道线的标注效率和标注质量。The present application provides a method and device for marking lane lines, which are used to improve the marking efficiency and marking quality of lane lines.
第一方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注方法,该方法适用于车道线标注装置,车道线标注装置可以是具有图像处理能力的装置、器件或芯片,还可以为车辆。该方法包括:车道线标注装置获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线,在第一车道线与路口中的障碍物相交,或者第一车道线与障碍物之间的最小距离小于预设的避障距离的情况下,并不在地图上标注第一车道线,而是从第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,并在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定出与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线。In a first aspect, the present application provides a lane marking method, which is suitable for a lane marking device, and the lane marking device may be a device, device or chip with image processing capability, and may also be a vehicle. The method includes: the lane line marking device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, determining the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, and determining the first lane line and the exit point. When the obstacles in the intersection intersect, or the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, the first lane line is not marked on the map, but from the two sides of the first lane line. Select one of the side areas as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance. According to the entry point, at least one control point and the exit point, determine that the minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance second lane line, and mark the second lane line on the map.
在上述设计中,通过在拟确定的第一车道线无法安全绕开路口中的障碍物的情况下, 重新确定能安全绕开路口中的障碍物的第二车道线,有助于通过一次标注操作直接在地图的路口中标注出具有准确避障能力的第二车道线,该方式既不需要依赖人工标注,也不需要人为二次调整,能有效提高车道线的标注质量和标注效率。更进一步的,在第一车道线不满足标注要求的情况下,通过在第一车道线的一侧区域内选择与障碍物的距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的控制点,作为确定第二车道线的基准,还能提高确定出满足避障距离要求的第二车道线的概率,提高标注车道线的成功率。In the above design, when the first lane line to be determined cannot safely bypass the obstacles in the intersection, the second lane line that can safely bypass the obstacles in the intersection is re-determined, which helps to pass a marking The operation directly marks the second lane line with accurate obstacle avoidance ability at the intersection of the map. This method does not need to rely on manual marking or manual secondary adjustment, which can effectively improve the marking quality and marking efficiency of lane lines. Further, in the case where the first lane line does not meet the labeling requirements, a control point whose distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected as the determination of the first lane line in one side area of the first lane line. The benchmark of the second lane line can also improve the probability of determining the second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance distance requirement, and improve the success rate of marking the lane line.
在一种可能的设计中,待标注的车道线可以为路口中的直行车道、左转车道或右转车道上的任一车道线,如两侧车道边线中的其中一条,或车道中心线。在这种情况下,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,可以包括如下内容中的任一项:如果第一车道线为临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距;如果第一车道线为不临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距与预设的车道宽度之和;或者,如果第一车道线为车道中心线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距与1/2倍的预设的车道宽度之和。其中,预设的避障间距可以为大于或等于0的实数。该设计不仅能支持车道线标注装置根据实际需求选择适合的车道线作为待标注的车道线,还针对于不同的车道线设置了不同的决策条件,每种车道线只有在符合自己的决策条件时才会重新确定第二车道线,有助于在节省计算资源的同时兼顾标注车道线的准确性。In a possible design, the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line. In this case, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any one of the following: if the first lane line is the lane edge adjacent to the obstacle, then the first The minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is a lane edge not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance and the preset obstacle avoidance distance. The sum of the preset lane widths; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the sum of the preset obstacle avoidance distance and 1/2 times the preset lane width . The preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0. The design can not only support the lane marking device to select suitable lanes as the lanes to be marked according to actual needs, but also set different decision-making conditions for different lanes. Each lane can only meet its own decision-making conditions. Only then will the second lane line be re-determined, which helps to save computing resources while taking into account the accuracy of marking the lane line.
在一种可能的设计中,目标避障区域可以满足如下条件中的至少一项:In a possible design, the target obstacle avoidance area can satisfy at least one of the following conditions:
条件一,目标避障区域位于具有交规指示功能的障碍物所指示的避障区域内。该条件能在障碍物所指示的避障区域内标注出满足交通规定的车道线,有效降低使用地图的车辆的违规风险。Condition 1, the target obstacle avoidance area is located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication. This condition can mark the lane line that meets the traffic regulations in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle, effectively reducing the risk of violation of the vehicle using the map.
条件二,在第一车道线与障碍物不相交的情况下,目标避障区域中不包含障碍物。在该条件中,不包含障碍物的区域相比于包含障碍物的区域来说,控制点更好选择,因此该条件有助于提高后续在目标避障区域内选择控制点的效率。Condition 2: When the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area does not contain obstacles. In this condition, the control point is better selected in the area without obstacles than in the area containing obstacles, so this condition helps to improve the efficiency of subsequent selection of control points in the target obstacle avoidance area.
条件三,在第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,目标避障区域中包含被第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中的面积最小的障碍物区域。该条件能通过对比两侧障碍物区域的面积,快速选择出目标避障区域。Condition 3: When the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area includes the obstacle area with the smallest area among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line. This condition can quickly select the target obstacle avoidance area by comparing the area of the obstacle areas on both sides.
条件四,在第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,目标避障区域中包含被第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中距离第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域。在该条件中,通过将距离第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域所在的一侧区域作为目标避障区域,能依赖于第一车道线与障碍物的位置关系,通过一个较小的变形获得第二车道线,有助于降低重新确定第二车道线的难度。且,由于第二车道线在距离障碍物边缘的最远距离最近的区域内进行绘制,因此还有可能让第二车道线具有较短的长度,有助于指示车辆通过较短的行驶距离尽快绕开障碍物,提高车辆的避障效率。Condition 4: When the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area includes the obstacle area with the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line. In this condition, by taking the side area where the obstacle area with the longest distance and the smallest distance from the first lane line is located as the target obstacle avoidance area, you can rely on the positional relationship between the first lane line and the obstacle to pass a smaller area. The deformation of , obtains the second lane line, which helps to reduce the difficulty of redefining the second lane line. Also, since the second lane line is drawn in the area closest to the furthest distance from the edge of the obstacle, it is also possible to have the second lane line with a shorter length, helping to direct the vehicle to travel the shorter distance as quickly as possible. Avoid obstacles and improve the vehicle's obstacle avoidance efficiency.
在一种可能的设计中,第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,车道线标注装置在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,包括:车道线标注装置从目标避障区域内包含的障碍物区域的边缘上找到距离第一车道线最远的第一位置点,并在目标避障区域内确定出与第一位置点的距离为预设的避障距离的第二位置点,将第二位置点作为一个控制点。其中,第二位置点与第一位置点的连线垂直于第一车道线的切线,或垂直于第一车道线与障碍物的两个交点之间的线段。该设计在第一车道线与障 碍物相交的情况下,通过以距离第一车道线最远的障碍物上的点作为障碍物临界点,能找到距离该障碍物临界点刚好满足避障要求的车道线临界点,通过以该车道线临界点为控制点,有助于绘制出刚好能实现避障能力的临界车道线。In a possible design, when the first lane line intersects with the obstacle, the lane line marking device selects at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, Including: the lane line marking device finds the first position point farthest from the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle area included in the target obstacle avoidance area, and determines the distance to the first position point in the target obstacle avoidance area is the second position point of the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the second position point is used as a control point. Wherein, the connecting line between the second position point and the first position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersection points of the first lane line and the obstacle. In this design, when the first lane line intersects with the obstacle, by using the point on the obstacle farthest from the first lane line as the obstacle critical point, it is possible to find a distance from the obstacle critical point that just meets the obstacle avoidance requirements. The critical point of the lane line, by taking the critical point of the lane line as the control point, helps to draw the critical lane line that can just achieve the ability to avoid obstacles.
在一种可能的设计中,第一车道线与障碍物不相交的情况下,车道线标注装置在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,包括:车道线标注装置从障碍物的边缘上找到距离第一车道线最近的第三位置点,并在目标避障区域内确定出与第三位置点的距离为预设的避障距离的第四位置点,将第四位置点作为一个控制点。其中,第四位置点与第三位置点的连线垂直于第一车道线的切线,或垂直于障碍物在第三位置点处的切线。该设计在第一车道线与障碍物不相交的情况下,通过以距离第一车道线最近的障碍物上的点作为障碍物临界点,能找到距离该障碍物临界点刚好满足避障要求的车道线临界点,通过以该车道线临界点为控制点,有助于绘制出刚好能实现避障能力的临界车道线。In a possible design, when the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, the lane line marking device selects at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance , including: the lane line marking device finds the third position point closest to the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle, and determines that the distance to the third position point in the target obstacle avoidance area is the preset obstacle avoidance distance. The fourth position point is used as a control point. Wherein, the connection line between the fourth position point and the third position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent line of the obstacle at the third position point. In this design, when the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, by using the point on the obstacle closest to the first lane line as the obstacle critical point, it is possible to find a distance from the obstacle critical point that just meets the obstacle avoidance requirements. The critical point of the lane line, by taking the critical point of the lane line as the control point, helps to draw the critical lane line that can just achieve the ability to avoid obstacles.
在一种可能的设计中,车道线标注装置在按照上述设计确定出控制点后,还可以自控制点沿垂直于连线的方向绘制控制线,并从控制线上选取分别位于控制点两侧的至少两个第五位置点,将至少两个第五位置点作为至少两个控制点。如此,通过以车道线临界点为基准重新获得位于临界点以外的更安全的控制点,有助于绘制出存在一定安全余量的避障车道线,提高标注车道线的安全性能。In a possible design, after the lane line marking device determines the control points according to the above design, it can also draw control lines from the control points in a direction perpendicular to the connecting line, and select from the control lines on both sides of the control point. The at least two fifth position points are used as at least two control points. In this way, by taking the critical point of the lane line as the benchmark to obtain the safer control point outside the critical point, it is helpful to draw the obstacle avoidance lane line with a certain safety margin and improve the safety performance of the marked lane line.
在一种可能的设计中,至少两个控制点可以包括如下内容中的至少一项:控制线与驶入线的交点作为一个控制点,控制线与驶出线的交点作为另一个控制点,其中,驶入线为自驶入点沿着驶入方向所作的直线,驶出线为自驶出点沿着驶出反方向所作的直线;控制线上的与控制点的距离等于第一车道线和障碍物的两个交点之间的线段长度的两个点作为两个控制点;控制线上的与控制点的距离等于障碍物内部的第一车道线长度的两个点作为控制点。如此,通过在控制线上的控制点两侧均匀选取两个控制点,能基于分布比较均匀的三个控制点绘制出较为平滑的第二车道线。In a possible design, the at least two control points may include at least one of the following: the intersection of the control line and the incoming line is used as one control point, the intersection of the control line and the outgoing line is used as another control point, Among them, the entry line is the straight line drawn from the entry point along the entry direction, and the exit line is the straight line drawn from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit; the distance between the control line and the control point is equal to the first lane The two points of the line segment length between the two intersection points of the line and the obstacle are used as the two control points; the two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle are used as the control points. In this way, by uniformly selecting two control points on both sides of the control point on the control line, a relatively smooth second lane line can be drawn based on the three control points with relatively uniform distribution.
在一种可能的设计中,车道线标注装置可以通过如下方式确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线:如果当前车道为直行车道,则车道线标注装置可以直接连接驶入点和驶出点获得第一车道线;如果当前车道为转弯车道线,则车道线标注装置可以先自驶入点沿着驶入方向延长得到驶入线,并自驶出点沿着驶出方向的反方向延长得到驶出线,然后根据驶入点、驶入线和驶出线的交点、以及驶出点,确定第一车道线。在该设计中,车道线标注装置能根据不同类型的车道选择不同的车道线确定方式,有助于更精细地绘制出满足当前车道类型的车道线。In a possible design, the lane marking device can determine the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point in the following manner: if the current lane is a straight lane, the lane marking device can directly connect the entry point and the exit point to obtain the first lane line; if the current lane is a turning lane line, the lane marking device can first extend from the entry point along the entry direction to obtain the entry line, and from the exit point along the exit direction Extend in the opposite direction to get the exit line, and then determine the first lane line according to the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point. In this design, the lane line marking device can select different lane line determination methods according to different types of lanes, which helps to draw the lane lines that meet the current lane type more precisely.
第二方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注方法,该方法适用于车道线标注装置,车道线标注装置可以是具有图像处理能力的装置、器件或芯片,还可以为车辆。该方法包括:车道线标注装置获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,在路口中选取至少两个控制点,根据驶入点、驶出点和至少两个控制点,确定至少两条第一车道线,该至少两条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线所使用的控制点不同,之后从至少两条第一车道线中确定出与路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,在地图上标注目标第一车道线。In a second aspect, the present application provides a lane marking method, which is suitable for a lane marking device, and the lane marking device may be a device, device or chip with image processing capability, and may also be a vehicle. The method includes: the lane marking device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, and selects at least two control points in the intersection, according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points. The control point is to determine at least two first lane lines, the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different, and then determine the intersection with the intersection from the at least two first lane lines The minimum distance of the obstacles in the target first lane line is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the target first lane line is marked on the map.
在上述设计中,通过预先在路口中拟合出多条第一车道线,能提高车道线标注装置从多条第一车道线中直接选择出能避开路口中障碍物的目标第一车道线的概率,而可以不再 重新确定车道线,该设计不仅有助于提高车道线标注的效率,还能在地图中标注具有避障功能的目标第一车道线,有效提高车道线标注的质量和准确性。In the above design, by fitting a plurality of first lane lines in the intersection in advance, the lane marking device can be improved to directly select the target first lane line that can avoid obstacles in the intersection from the plurality of first lane lines This design not only helps to improve the efficiency of lane marking, but also marks the first target lane with obstacle avoidance function on the map, which effectively improves the quality and efficiency of lane marking. accuracy.
在一种可能的设计中,待标注的车道线可以为路口中的直行车道、左转车道或右转车道上的任一车道线,如两侧车道边线中的其中一条,或车道中心线。在这种情况下,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离,可以包括如下内容中的任一项:如果第一车道线为临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距;如果第一车道线为不临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距与预设的车道宽度之和;或者,如果第一车道线为车道中心线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距与1/2倍的预设的车道宽度之和。其中,预设的避障间距为大于或等于0的实数。In a possible design, the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line. In this case, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: The minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is the lane edge line not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance The sum of the spacing and the preset lane width; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance spacing and 1/2 times the preset Sum of lane widths. The preset obstacle avoidance distance is a real number greater than or equal to 0.
在一种可能的设计中,车道线标注装置在路口中选取至少两个控制点,包括:车道线标注装置在路口中选择与障碍物的距离大于预设的避障距离的至少两个控制点。如此,通过在路口中选择与障碍物的距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的控制点,作为确定第一车道线的基准,能提高确定出满足避障距离要求的第一车道线的概率。In a possible design, the lane marking device selects at least two control points at the intersection, including: the lane marking device selects at least two control points in the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than a preset obstacle avoidance distance . In this way, by selecting a control point at the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance as the reference for determining the first lane line, the probability of determining the first lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance distance requirement can be improved. .
在一种可能的设计中,车道线标注装置从至少两条第一车道线中确定出与路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,包括:若障碍物为具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则车道线标注装置从位于障碍物所指示的目标避障区域内的第一车道线中选择目标第一车道线,以便满足障碍物的指示的避障规则。若障碍物为不具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则从至少两条第一车道线中选择目标第一车道线,在障碍物不具有交规指示功能时,并未指出障碍物,可根据实际需要选择。其中,目标第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离。In a possible design, the lane line marking device determines, from the at least two first lane lines, a target first lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle in the intersection is not less than a preset obstacle avoidance distance, including: if If the obstacle is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, the lane line marking device selects the target first lane line from the first lane line located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle, so as to satisfy the obstacle avoidance indicated by the obstacle rule. If the obstacle is an obstacle that does not have the function of traffic regulation indication, select the target first lane line from at least two first lane lines. choose. Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在一种可能的设计中,车道线标注装置若确定至少两条第一车道线中不包含与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,则还可以从至少两条第一车道线中选择基准第一车道线,从基准第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,并在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定出与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的第二车道线,进而在地图上标注第二车道线。在该设计中,通过在拟确定的多条第一车道线都无法安全绕开路口中的障碍物的情况下,重新确定能安全绕开路口中的障碍物的第二车道线,有助于在地图的路口中标注出具有准确避障能力的第二车道线,有效提高车道线的标注质量和标注效率。In a possible design, if the device for marking lane lines determines that the at least two first lane lines do not include the target first lane line whose minimum distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, it can also select the target first lane line from at least one of the first lane lines. Select the reference first lane line from the two first lane lines, select one of the areas on both sides of the reference first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select the distance from the obstacle within the target obstacle avoidance area. At least one control point less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, determine the second lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then Mark the second lane line on the map. In this design, when the multiple first lane lines to be determined cannot safely bypass the obstacles in the intersection, the second lane line that can safely bypass the obstacles in the intersection is re-determined, which helps The second lane line with accurate obstacle avoidance ability is marked in the intersection of the map, which effectively improves the marking quality and marking efficiency of the lane line.
应理解,关于第二方面中重新确定第二车道线的具体实现过程,可以直接参照上述第一方面中的相应设计,此处不再重复一一赘述。It should be understood that, regarding the specific implementation process of re-determining the second lane line in the second aspect, the corresponding design in the above-mentioned first aspect may be directly referred to, and details will not be repeated here.
第三方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括:获取单元,用于获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点;确定单元,用于确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线,其中,第一车道线与路口中的障碍物相交,或者第一车道线与障碍物之间的最小距离小于预设的避障距离;选择单元,用于从第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点;确定单元,还用于根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定第二车道线,第二车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离;标注单元,用于在地图上标注第二车道线。In a third aspect, the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising: an acquiring unit for acquiring the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection; Move the point to the first lane line of the exit point, where the first lane line intersects the obstacle in the intersection, or the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; selection unit, It is used to select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select at least one control point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; determine The unit is also used to determine the second lane line according to the entry point, at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; the labeling unit is used for The second lane line is marked on the map.
在一种可能的设计中,待标注的车道线可以为路口中的直行车道、左转车道或右转车道上的任一车道线,如两侧车道边线中的其中一条,或车道中心线。在这种情况下,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,可以包括如下内容中的任一项:如果第一车道线为临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距;如果第一车道线为不临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距与预设的车道宽度之和;或者,如果第一车道线为车道中心线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距与1/2倍的预设的车道宽度之和。其中,预设的避障间距可以为大于或等于0的实数。In a possible design, the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line. In this case, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any one of the following: if the first lane line is the lane edge adjacent to the obstacle, then the first The minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is a lane edge not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance and the preset obstacle avoidance distance. The sum of the preset lane widths; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the sum of the preset obstacle avoidance distance and 1/2 times the preset lane width . The preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0.
在一种可能的设计中,目标避障区域可以满足如下条件中的至少一项:目标避障区域位于具有交规指示功能的障碍物所指示的避障区域内;在第一车道线与障碍物不相交的情况下,目标避障区域中不包含障碍物;在第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,目标避障区域中包含被第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中的面积最小的障碍物区域;或者,在第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,目标避障区域中包含被第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中距离第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域。In a possible design, the target obstacle avoidance area may satisfy at least one of the following conditions: the target obstacle avoidance area is located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic instruction function; In the case of no intersection, the target obstacle avoidance area does not contain obstacles; when the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area includes the area of the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line The smallest obstacle area; or, in the case where the first lane line intersects an obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area contains the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line obstacle area.
在一种可能的设计中,第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,选择单元可以从目标避障区域内包含的障碍物区域的边缘上找到距离第一车道线最远的第一位置点,并在目标避障区域内确定出与第一位置点的距离为预设的避障距离的第二位置点,将第二位置点作为一个控制点。其中,第二位置点与第一位置点的连线垂直于第一车道线的切线,或垂直于第一车道线与障碍物的两个交点之间的线段。In a possible design, when the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the selection unit may find the first position point farthest from the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle area included in the target obstacle avoidance area , and determine a second position point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the first position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and use the second position point as a control point. Wherein, the connecting line between the second position point and the first position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersection points of the first lane line and the obstacle.
在一种可能的设计中,第一车道线与障碍物不相交的情况下,选择单元可以从障碍物的边缘上找到距离第一车道线最近的第三位置点,并在目标避障区域内确定出与第三位置点的距离为预设的避障距离的第四位置点,将第四位置点作为一个控制点。其中,第四位置点与第三位置点的连线垂直于第一车道线的切线,或垂直于障碍物在第三位置点处的切线。In a possible design, when the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, the selection unit can find the third position point closest to the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle, and locate it within the target obstacle avoidance area A fourth position point whose distance from the third position point is a preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined, and the fourth position point is used as a control point. Wherein, the connection line between the fourth position point and the third position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent line of the obstacle at the third position point.
在一种可能的设计中,选择单元在按照上述设计确定出控制点后,还可以自控制点沿垂直于连线的方向绘制控制线,并从控制线上选取分别位于控制点两侧的至少两个第五位置点,将至少两个第五位置点作为至少两个控制点。In a possible design, after the selection unit determines the control points according to the above design, it can also draw control lines from the control points in a direction perpendicular to the connection line, and select at least two Two fifth position points, at least two fifth position points are used as at least two control points.
在一种可能的设计中,至少两个控制点可以包括如下内容中的至少一项:控制线与驶入线的交点作为一个控制点,控制线与驶出线的交点作为另一个控制点,其中,驶入线为自驶入点沿着驶入方向所作的直线,驶出线为自驶出点沿着驶出反方向所作的直线;控制线上的与控制点的距离等于第一车道线和障碍物的两个交点之间的线段长度的两个点作为两个控制点;或者,控制线上的与控制点的距离等于障碍物内部的第一车道线长度的两个点作为两个控制点。In a possible design, the at least two control points may include at least one of the following: the intersection of the control line and the incoming line is used as one control point, the intersection of the control line and the outgoing line is used as another control point, Among them, the entry line is the straight line drawn from the entry point along the entry direction, and the exit line is the straight line drawn from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit; the distance between the control line and the control point is equal to the first lane The two points of the line segment length between the two intersections of the line and the obstacle are regarded as two control points; or, the two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle are regarded as two control points. a control point.
在一种可能的设计中,确定单元可以通过如下方式确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线:如果当前车道为直行车道,则确定单元可以直接连接驶入点和驶出点获得第一车道线;如果当前车道为转弯车道线,则确定单元可以自驶入点沿着驶入方向延长得到驶入线,并自驶出点沿着驶出方向的反方向延长得到驶出线,根据驶入点、驶入线和驶出线的交点、以及驶出点,确定第一车道线。In a possible design, the determination unit may determine the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point by: if the current lane is a straight lane, the determination unit may directly connect the entry point and the exit point Obtain the first lane line; if the current lane is a turning lane line, the determination unit can extend from the entry point along the entry direction to obtain the entry line, and extend from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit direction to obtain the exit The first lane line is determined according to the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point.
第四方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括:获取单元,用于获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点;选择单元,用于在路口中选取至少两个控制点; 确定单元,用于根据驶入点、驶出点和至少两个控制点,确定至少两条第一车道线,从至少两条第一车道线中确定出与路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线;其中,至少两条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线所使用的控制点不同;标注单元,用于在地图上标注目标第一车道线。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising: an acquisition unit for acquiring the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection; and a selection unit for selecting from the intersection at least two control points; a determining unit, configured to determine at least two first lane lines according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, and determine from the at least two first lane lines the intersection with the intersection in the intersection. The target first lane line with the minimum distance of the obstacle not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; wherein, the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different; the labeling unit is used for Mark the target first lane line on the map.
在一种可能的设计中,待标注的车道线可以为路口中的直行车道、左转车道或右转车道上的任一车道线,如两侧车道边线中的其中一条,或车道中心线。在这种情况下,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离,可以包括如下内容中的任一项:如果第一车道线为临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距;如果第一车道线为不临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距与预设的车道宽度之和;或者,如果第一车道线为车道中心线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距与1/2倍的预设的车道宽度之和。其中,预设的避障间距可以为大于或等于0的实数。In a possible design, the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line. In this case, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: The minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is the lane edge line not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance The sum of the spacing and the preset lane width; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance spacing and 1/2 times the preset Sum of lane widths. The preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0.
在一种可能的设计中,选择单元可以在路口中选择与障碍物的距离大于预设的避障距离的至少两个控制点。In a possible design, the selection unit may select at least two control points in the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在一种可能的设计中,障碍物为具有交规指示功能的障碍物的情况下,确定单元可以从位于障碍物所指示的目标避障区域内的第一车道线中选择目标第一车道线。其中,目标第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离。In a possible design, when the obstacle is an obstacle with a traffic regulation indication function, the determining unit may select the target first lane line from the first lane lines located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle. Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在一种可能的设计中,障碍物为不具有交规指示功能的障碍物的情况下,确定单元可以从至少两条第一车道线中选择目标第一车道线。其中,目标第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离。In a possible design, when the obstacle is an obstacle without a traffic regulation indication function, the determining unit may select the target first lane line from the at least two first lane lines. Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在一种可能的设计中,至少两条第一车道线中不包含与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线的情况下,选择单元还可以从至少两条第一车道线中选择基准第一车道线,从基准第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,确定单元还可以根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定第二车道线,第二车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离,标注单元还可以在地图上标注第二车道线。In a possible design, when the at least two first lane lines do not include a target first lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, the selection unit may also select from the at least two Select the reference first lane line from the first lane line, select one of the areas on both sides of the reference first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select the distance to the obstacle in the target obstacle avoidance area not less than the preset distance At least one control point of the obstacle avoidance distance, the determining unit can also determine the second lane line according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset avoidance point. The distance of the obstacle, the labeling unit can also mark the second lane line on the map.
应理解,关于第四方面中重新确定第二车道线的具体实现过程,可以直接参照上述第一方面中的相应设计,此处不再重复一一赘述。It should be understood that, regarding the specific implementation process of re-determining the second lane line in the fourth aspect, the corresponding design in the above-mentioned first aspect may be directly referred to, and details will not be repeated here.
第五方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器、收发器和存储器,处理器和存储器相连,存储器存储计算机程序,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置执行:获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线,在第一车道线与路口中的障碍物相交,或者第一车道线与障碍物之间的最小距离小于预设的避障距离的情况下,不在地图上标注第一车道线,而是从第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,并在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定出与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor, a transceiver and a memory, the processor is connected to the memory, the memory stores a computer program, and when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane line The labeling device executes: obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle exiting the intersection, determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, and the obstacles in the first lane line and the intersection When the object intersects, or the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, the first lane line is not marked on the map, but is selected from the areas on both sides of the first lane line. One side area is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, and within the target obstacle avoidance area, at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected. According to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, It is determined that the minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance second lane line, and the second lane line is marked on the map.
在一种可能的设计中,待标注的车道线可以为路口中的直行车道、左转车道或右转车道上的任一车道线,如两侧车道边线中的其中一条,或车道中心线。在这种情况下,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,可以包括如下内容中的任一项:如果第 一车道线为临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距;如果第一车道线为不临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距与预设的车道宽度之和;或者,如果第一车道线为车道中心线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障间距与1/2倍的预设的车道宽度之和。其中,预设的避障间距可以为大于或等于0的实数。In a possible design, the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line. In this case, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any one of the following: if the first lane line is the lane edge adjacent to the obstacle, then the first The minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is a lane edge not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance and the preset obstacle avoidance distance. The sum of the preset lane widths; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the sum of the preset obstacle avoidance distance and 1/2 times the preset lane width . The preset obstacle avoidance distance may be a real number greater than or equal to 0.
在一种可能的设计中,目标避障区域可以满足如下条件中的至少一项:目标避障区域位于具有交规指示功能的障碍物所指示的避障区域内;在第一车道线与障碍物不相交的情况下,目标避障区域中不包含障碍物;在第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,目标避障区域中包含被第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中的面积最小的障碍物区域;或者,在第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,目标避障区域中包含被第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中距离第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域。In a possible design, the target obstacle avoidance area may satisfy at least one of the following conditions: the target obstacle avoidance area is located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic instruction function; In the case of no intersection, the target obstacle avoidance area does not contain obstacles; when the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area includes the area of the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line The smallest obstacle area; or, in the case where the first lane line intersects an obstacle, the target obstacle avoidance area contains the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line obstacle area.
在一种可能的设计中,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置具体执行:在第一车道线与障碍物相交时,从目标避障区域内包含的障碍物区域的边缘上找到距离第一车道线最远的第一位置点,并在目标避障区域内确定出与第一位置点的距离为预设的避障距离的第二位置点,将第二位置点作为一个控制点。其中,第二位置点与第一位置点的连线垂直于第一车道线的切线,或垂直于第一车道线与障碍物的两个交点之间的线段。In a possible design, when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the device for marking lane lines is made to specifically execute: when the first lane line intersects the obstacle, select the obstacle from the obstacle contained in the target obstacle avoidance area. Find the first position point farthest from the first lane line on the edge of the area, and determine the second position point in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the first position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance. The location point acts as a control point. Wherein, the connecting line between the second position point and the first position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersection points of the first lane line and the obstacle.
在一种可能的设计中,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置具体执行:在第一车道线与障碍物不相交时,从障碍物的边缘上找到距离第一车道线最近的第三位置点,并在目标避障区域内确定出与第三位置点的距离为预设的避障距离的第四位置点,将第四位置点作为一个控制点。其中,第四位置点与第三位置点的连线垂直于第一车道线的切线,或垂直于障碍物在第三位置点处的切线。In a possible design, when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane line marking device is specifically executed: when the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, find the distance from the edge of the obstacle to the The third position point closest to a lane line, and a fourth position point whose distance from the third position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined in the target obstacle avoidance area, and the fourth position point is used as a control point. Wherein, the connection line between the fourth position point and the third position point is perpendicular to the tangent line of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent line of the obstacle at the third position point.
在一种可能的设计中,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置在按照上述设计确定出控制点后,还执行:自控制点沿垂直于连线的方向绘制控制线,并从控制线上选取分别位于控制点两侧的至少两个第五位置点,将至少两个第五位置点作为至少两个控制点。In a possible design, when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, after the lane marking device determines the control point according to the above design, it also executes: drawing from the control point in a direction perpendicular to the connecting line A control line is selected, and at least two fifth position points respectively located on both sides of the control point are selected from the control line, and the at least two fifth position points are used as the at least two control points.
在一种可能的设计中,至少两个控制点可以包括如下内容中的至少一项:控制线与驶入线的交点作为一个控制点,控制线与驶出线的交点作为另一个控制点,其中,驶入线为自驶入点沿着驶入方向所作的直线,驶出线为自驶出点沿着驶出反方向所作的直线;控制线上的与控制点的距离等于第一车道线和障碍物的两个交点之间的线段长度的两个点作为两个控制点;控制线上的与控制点的距离等于障碍物内部的第一车道线长度的两个点作为控制点。In a possible design, the at least two control points may include at least one of the following: the intersection of the control line and the incoming line is used as one control point, the intersection of the control line and the outgoing line is used as another control point, Among them, the entry line is the straight line drawn from the entry point along the entry direction, and the exit line is the straight line drawn from the exit point along the opposite direction of the exit; the distance between the control line and the control point is equal to the first lane The two points of the line segment length between the two intersection points of the line and the obstacle are used as the two control points; the two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle are used as the control points.
在一种可能的设计中,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置通过如下方式确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线:如果当前车道为直行车道,则连接驶入点和驶出点以获得第一车道线;如果当前车道为转弯车道线,则先自驶入点沿着驶入方向延长得到驶入线,并自驶出点沿着驶出方向的反方向延长得到驶出线,然后根据驶入点、驶入线和驶出线的交点、以及驶出点,确定第一车道线。In a possible design, when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the device for marking lane lines determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point in the following manner: if the current lane is straight If the current lane is a turning lane, first extend the entry point along the entry direction to obtain the entry line, and extend along the entry direction from the exit point to obtain the first lane line. The exit line is extended in the opposite direction of the exit direction, and then the first lane line is determined according to the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point.
第六方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器、收发器和存储器,处理器和存储器相连,存储器存储计算机程序,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置执行:获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,在 路口中选取至少两个控制点,根据驶入点、驶出点和至少两个控制点,确定至少两条第一车道线,该至少两条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线所使用的控制点不同,之后从至少两条第一车道线中确定出与路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,在地图上标注目标第一车道线。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor, a transceiver and a memory, the processor is connected to the memory, the memory stores a computer program, and when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane line The labeling device executes: obtaining the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, selecting at least two control points in the intersection, and determining the entry point, exit point and at least two control points according to the entry point, exit point and at least two control points. At least two first lane lines, any two of the at least two first lane lines use different control points, and then determine from the at least two first lane lines with obstacles in the intersection The minimum distance of the target first lane line is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the target first lane line is marked on the map.
在一种可能的设计中,待标注的车道线可以为路口中的直行车道、左转车道或右转车道上的任一车道线,如两侧车道边线中的其中一条,或车道中心线。在这种情况下,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离,可以包括如下内容中的任一项:如果第一车道线为临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距;如果第一车道线为不临近障碍物的车道边线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距与预设的车道宽度之和;或者,如果第一车道线为车道中心线,则第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障间距与1/2倍的预设的车道宽度之和。其中,预设的避障间距为大于或等于0的实数。In a possible design, the lane line to be marked can be any lane line on the straight lane, left-turn lane, or right-turn lane in the intersection, such as one of the lane edges on both sides, or the lane center line. In this case, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: The minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance; if the first lane line is the lane edge line not adjacent to the obstacle, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance The sum of the spacing and the preset lane width; or, if the first lane line is the lane center line, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance spacing and 1/2 times the preset Sum of lane widths. The preset obstacle avoidance distance is a real number greater than or equal to 0.
在一种可能的设计中,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置具体执行:在路口中选择与障碍物的距离大于预设的避障距离的至少两个控制点。In a possible design, when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the lane marking device is made to specifically execute: selecting at least two controls at the intersection whose distance from the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance point.
在一种可能的设计中,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置具体执行:若障碍物为具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则从位于障碍物所指示的目标避障区域内的第一车道线中选择目标第一车道线;若障碍物为不具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则从至少两条第一车道线中选择目标第一车道线。其中,目标第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离。In a possible design, when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the device for marking lane lines is specifically executed: if the obstacle is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, then the target located at the target indicated by the obstacle will be executed. The target first lane line is selected from the first lane lines in the obstacle avoidance area; if the obstacle is an obstacle without the function of traffic regulation indication, the target first lane line is selected from at least two first lane lines. Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在一种可能的设计中,当存储器中存储的计算机程序被处理器执行时,使得车道线标注装置还可以执行:若确定至少两条第一车道线中不包含与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,则从至少两条第一车道线中选择基准第一车道线,从基准第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,并在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定出与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的第二车道线,进而在地图上标注第二车道线。In a possible design, when the computer program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the device for marking lane lines can also be executed: if it is determined that the minimum distance from the obstacle not included in the at least two first lane lines is not less than If the target first lane line of the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected, the reference first lane line is selected from at least two first lane lines, and one of the areas on both sides of the reference first lane line is selected as the target obstacle avoidance In the target obstacle avoidance area, select at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and determine the minimum distance from the obstacle according to the entry point, at least one control point and exit point. The second lane line whose distance is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then the second lane line is marked on the map.
应理解,关于第六方面中重新确定第二车道线的具体实现过程,可以直接参照上述第一方面中的相应设计,此处不再重复一一赘述。It should be understood that, regarding the specific implementation process of re-determining the second lane line in the sixth aspect, the corresponding design in the above-mentioned first aspect may be directly referred to, and details will not be repeated here.
第七方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器和通信接口,通信接口用于接收来自除车道线标注装置以外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至处理器或将来自处理器的信号发送给除车道线标注装置以外的其它通信装置;处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如上述第一方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a communication interface, where the communication interface is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the lane marking device and transmit to the processor or transfer signals from the processor. The signal is sent to other communication devices other than the lane marking device; the processor is used to implement the method according to any one of the designs of the first aspect above through a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
第八方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器和通信接口,通信接口用于接收来自除车道线标注装置以外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至处理器或将来自处理器的信号发送给除车道线标注装置以外的其它通信装置;处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如上述第二方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the lane marking device and transmit to the processor or transfer signals from the processor. The signal is sent to other communication devices other than the lane marking device; the processor is used to implement the method according to any one of the designs of the second aspect above through a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
第九方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器,处理器与存储器相连,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得车道线标注装置执行如上述第一方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device for marking lane lines performs as follows: The method described in any one of the designs of the first aspect above.
第十方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器,处理器与存储器相连,存 储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得车道线标注装置执行如上述第二方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a device for marking lane lines, comprising a processor, the processor is connected to a memory, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for executing the computer program stored in the memory, so that the device for marking lane lines performs the following: The method described in any one of the above-mentioned second aspects.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器和存储器,存储器存储计算机程序指令,处理器运行计算机程序指令以实现如上述第一方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a memory, the memory stores computer program instructions, and the processor executes the computer program instructions to implement the method described in any one of the designs of the first aspect above.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种车道线标注装置,包括处理器和存储器,存储器存储计算机程序指令,处理器运行计算机程序指令以实现如上述第二方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a lane marking device, comprising a processor and a memory, the memory stores computer program instructions, and the processor executes the computer program instructions to implement the method described in any one of the designs of the second aspect above.
第十三方面,本申请提供一种车辆,车辆采集环境图像后构建点云地图,并按照如上述第一方面或第二方面中任一项设计所述的方法在点云地图上标注车道线。According to a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides a vehicle. After the vehicle collects an image of the environment, a point cloud map is constructed, and lane lines are marked on the point cloud map according to the method described in any one of the first aspect or the second aspect above. .
第十四方面,本申请提供一种车联网系统,包括车辆和制图设备,车辆采集环境图像后发送给制图设备,制图设备利用环境图像构建点云地图,并按照如上述第一方面或第二方面中任一项设计所述的方法在点云地图上标注车道线。In a fourteenth aspect, the present application provides an Internet of Vehicles system, including a vehicle and a mapping device, the vehicle collects an environmental image and sends it to the mapping device, and the mapping device uses the environmental image to construct a point cloud map, and according to the above-mentioned first aspect or second The method of any one of the aspects annotates lane lines on a point cloud map.
第十五方面,本申请提供一种芯片,该芯片可以包括处理器和接口,处理器用于通过接口读取指令,以执行如上述第一方面中任一项设计所述的方法、或执行如上述第二方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, the present application provides a chip, which may include a processor and an interface, where the processor is configured to read instructions through the interface, so as to execute the method described in any one of the designs of the first aspect above, or execute the method described in the first aspect. The method described in any one of the above-mentioned second aspects.
第十六方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当计算机程序被运行时,实现如上述第一方面中的任一项设计所述的方法、或实现如上述第二方面中的任一项设计所述的方法。In a sixteenth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of the designs of the first aspect above is implemented. , or implement the method described in any one of the designs of the second aspect above.
第十七方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在处理器上运行时,实现如上述第一方面中任一项设计所述的方法、或实现如上述第二方面中任一项设计所述的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on a processor, implements the method described in any one of the designs in the above first aspect, or implements the above second aspect The method described in any of the designs.
上述第二方面至第十七方面中各项设计的有益效果,具体请参照上述第一方面中相应设计可以达到的技术效果,这里不再重复赘述。For the beneficial effects of the designs in the above-mentioned second aspect to the seventeenth aspect, please refer to the technical effects that can be achieved by the corresponding designs in the above-mentioned first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
图1示例性示出本申请实施例适用的一种可能的系统架构示意图;FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable;
图2示例性示出本申请实施例一提供的一种车道线标注方法的流程示意图;FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;
图3示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种驶入点和驶出点的路口情况示意图;FIG. 3 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of an intersection situation of an entry point and an exit point provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4示例性示出本申请实施例二提供的一种车道线标注方法的流程示意图;FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;
图5示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种左转车道线的制图流程示意图;FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a drawing of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6示例性示出本申请实施例三提供的一种车道线标注方法的流程示意图;FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;
图7示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种左转车道线的制图流程示意图;FIG. 7 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a drawing of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种在路口中标注转弯车道线的流程示意图;FIG. 8 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9示例性示出本申请实施例提供的另一种在路口中标注转弯车道线的流程示意图;FIG. 9 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种在路口中标注直行车道线的流程示意图;FIG. 10 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11示例性示出本申请实施例提供的另一种在路口中标注直行车道线的流程示意图;FIG. 11 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种车道线标注装置的结构示意图;FIG. 12 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a lane marking device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13示例性示出本申请实施例提供的另一种车道线标注装置的结构示意图。FIG. 13 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another lane marking device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的车道线标注方案可以应用于车联网,如车-万物(vehicle to everything,V2X)、车间通信长期演进技术(long term evolution-vehicle,LTE-V)、车辆-车辆(vehicle-vehicle,V2V)等。例如可以应用于具有车道线标注功能的车辆,或者车辆中具有车道线标注功能的其它装置。该其它装置包括但不限于:车载终端、车载控制器、车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片、车载单元、车载雷达或车载摄像头等其它传感器,车辆可通过该车载终端、车载控制器、车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片、车载单元、车载雷达或摄像头,实施本申请提供的车道线标注方法。当然,本申请实施例中的车道线标注方案还可以用于除了车辆之外的其它具有车道线标注功能的智能终端,或设置在除了车辆之外的其它具有车道线标注功能的智能终端中,或设置于该智能终端的部件中。该智能终端可以为智能运输设备、智能家居设备、机器人等其他终端设备。例如包括但不限于智能终端或智能终端内的控制器、芯片、雷达或摄像头等其它传感器、以及其它部件等。It should be noted that the lane marking scheme in this embodiment of the present application can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles, such as vehicle-to-everything (V2X), long term evolution-vehicle (LTE-V), Vehicle-vehicle (vehicle-vehicle, V2V), etc. For example, it can be applied to a vehicle with a lane marking function, or other devices in a vehicle with a lane marking function. The other devices include but are not limited to: on-board terminals, on-board controllers, on-board modules, on-board modules, on-board components, on-board chips, on-board units, on-board radars or on-board cameras and other sensors. , vehicle-mounted modules, vehicle-mounted modules, vehicle-mounted components, vehicle-mounted chips, vehicle-mounted units, vehicle-mounted radars or cameras, and implement the lane marking method provided in this application. Of course, the lane marking solution in the embodiment of the present application can also be used in other intelligent terminals with lane marking function other than vehicles, or set in other intelligent terminals with lane marking function other than vehicles, Or set in a component of the smart terminal. The intelligent terminal may be other terminal equipment such as intelligent transportation equipment, smart home equipment, and robots. For example, it includes, but is not limited to, a smart terminal or other sensors such as a controller, a chip, a radar or a camera, and other components in the smart terminal.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。应理解,下文所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请的一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。且,在下文的描述中,制图设备也可以替换为具有车道线标注功能的其它装置、或其它装置中的部件或芯片,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. It should be understood that the embodiments described below are only a part of the embodiments of the present application, but not all of the embodiments. Moreover, in the following description, the drawing device may also be replaced by other devices having the function of marking lane lines, or components or chips in other devices, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
图1为本申请实施例适用的一种可能的系统架构示意图,如图1所示的系统架构包括采集车辆110和制图设备120。其中,采集车辆110是指具有图像采集功能的车辆,该图像采集功能可以由设置在其上的车载摄像头或车载雷达等传感器部件实现。制图设备120可以是指具有图像处理功能的装置、器件或芯片,诸如可以包括主机或处理器等实体设备,也可以包括虚拟机或容器等虚拟设备,还可以包括芯片或集成电路。当然也可以是车辆,例如采集车辆110自主完成图像采集及地图制作的全过程。在车联网中,制图设备120通常可以为车联网服务器,也称为云服务器、云、云端、云端服务器或云端控制器等,该车联网服务器可以是单个服务器,也可以是由多个服务器构成的服务器集群,具体不作限定。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a possible system architecture to which the embodiment of the application is applied. The system architecture shown in FIG. 1 includes a collection vehicle 110 and a drawing device 120 . The collection vehicle 110 refers to a vehicle with an image collection function, and the image collection function can be realized by a sensor component such as a vehicle-mounted camera or a vehicle-mounted radar set on the vehicle. The drawing device 120 may refer to an apparatus, device or chip with image processing functions, such as a physical device such as a host or a processor, a virtual device such as a virtual machine or a container, and a chip or an integrated circuit. Of course, it can also be a vehicle, for example, the acquisition vehicle 110 autonomously completes the entire process of image acquisition and map making. In the Internet of Vehicles, the mapping device 120 can usually be a server of the Internet of Vehicles, also known as a cloud server, cloud, cloud, cloud server or cloud controller, etc. The Internet of Vehicles server can be a single server, or can be composed of multiple servers The server cluster is not limited.
应理解,本申请实施例对系统架构中采集车辆110的数量和制图设备120的数量均不作限定。通常情况下,一个制图设备120可以同时与多台采集车辆110连接(例如图1所示意的同时与3台采集车辆110连接),以便制图设备120利用多台采集车辆110并行采集的不同环线数据高效地制作全局的高精地图。此外,本申请实施例所适用的系统架构中除了包括采集车辆110和制图设备120以外,还可以包括其它设备,如核心网设备、无线中继设备和无线回传设备等,对此本申请实施例也不作限定。以及,本申请实施例中的制图设备120可以将所有的功能集成在一个独立的物理设备上,也可以将不同功能分别部署在多个独立的物理设备上,对此本申请实施例也不作限定。It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the number of the collection vehicles 110 and the number of the drawing devices 120 in the system architecture. Normally, one mapping device 120 can be connected to multiple collection vehicles 110 at the same time (for example, as shown in FIG. 1 , it can be connected to three collection vehicles 110 at the same time), so that the mapping device 120 can utilize different loop data collected by multiple collection vehicles 110 in parallel. Efficiently create global high-precision maps. In addition, in addition to the acquisition vehicle 110 and the mapping device 120, the system architecture to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable may also include other devices, such as core network devices, wireless relay devices, and wireless backhaul devices, etc., which is implemented in this application. Examples are not limited. In addition, the drawing device 120 in the embodiment of the present application may integrate all functions on an independent physical device, and may also deploy different functions on a plurality of independent physical devices, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present application. .
在实施中,制图设备120可以联合采集车辆110制作用于指导车辆通行的高精地图。在实施中,测绘人员先驾驶或遥控采集车辆110沿着城市中的各条环线行驶,采集车辆110在行驶过程中调用车载摄像头拍摄周围环境获得摄像头数据,以及调用激光雷达感知周围环境获得激光雷达数据,将摄像头数据和激光雷达数据一起上报给制图设备120。制图设备120将摄像头数据投影到激光雷达数据上,利用激光雷达数据细化以去除摄像头数据中由于光线等气象信息所导致的异常值后,使用三维建模算法结合处理后的摄像头数据构建点云地图,进而在点云地图上标注出车道、交通标志物、红绿灯以及虚拟车道线等交通实 体的结构化信息,获得高精地图。其中,在点云地图上标注的虚拟车道线可以包括车道的两条边线中的一个或两个,也可以包括位于车道的两条边线之间且与两条边线平行的一条线,如车道的中心线。通过在点云地图上标注虚拟车道线,能尽量让使用高精地图的车辆在通行过程中居车道中央行驶,避免碰触到道路边界或车道边界,尽量维持行车的安全距离。In implementation, the mapping device 120 may jointly collect the vehicle 110 to make a high-precision map for guiding the passing of the vehicle. In the implementation, the surveying and mapping personnel first drive or remotely control the collection vehicle 110 to drive along various loops in the city, and the collection vehicle 110 calls the vehicle-mounted camera to capture the surrounding environment during driving to obtain camera data, and calls the lidar to perceive the surrounding environment to obtain lidar. data, the camera data and the lidar data are reported to the mapping device 120 together. The mapping device 120 projects the camera data onto the lidar data, uses the lidar data to refine to remove outliers in the camera data due to meteorological information such as light, and then uses a three-dimensional modeling algorithm to combine the processed camera data to construct a point cloud Map, and then mark the structured information of traffic entities such as lanes, traffic signs, traffic lights, and virtual lane lines on the point cloud map to obtain a high-precision map. The virtual lane line marked on the point cloud map may include one or both of the two edge lines of the lane, or may include a line between and parallel to the two edge lines of the lane, such as the centerline. By marking the virtual lane lines on the point cloud map, the vehicles using the high-precision map can drive in the center of the lane as much as possible, avoid touching the road boundary or lane boundary, and try to maintain a safe driving distance.
在一种车道线的自动标注方案中,制图设备120先调用绘图软件根据点云地图上的驶入点和驶出点自动标注车道线,再显示给调整人员进行检查,调整人员在发现自动标注的车道线与障碍物相交时,人为地调整车道线至不相交。可见,虽然该种自动标注方案能标注出准确的车道线,但标注之前至少需要执行绘图软件标注和人工调整这两个步骤,不利于提高车道线的标注效率。也即是说,该种自动标注方案也无法同时兼顾车道线的标注效率和标注质量。In an automatic marking scheme of lane lines, the drawing device 120 first calls the drawing software to automatically mark the lane lines according to the entry point and exit point on the point cloud map, and then displays it to the adjustment personnel for inspection. When the lane line and the obstacle intersect, artificially adjust the lane line to not intersect. It can be seen that although this automatic labeling scheme can label accurate lane lines, at least two steps of drawing software labeling and manual adjustment need to be performed before labeling, which is not conducive to improving the efficiency of lane line labeling. That is to say, this automatic labeling scheme cannot take into account the labeling efficiency and labeling quality of lane lines at the same time.
本申请实施例中的车道线标注方法用于在点云地图的路口中自动标注出能直接避开路口中的障碍物的车道线,而不需要人工参与,以同时兼顾车道线的标注效率和标注质量。下面将结合附图对本申请作进一步地详细描述。应理解,方法实施例中的具体操作方法也可以应用于装置实施例或系统实施例中。需要说明的是,在本申请的描述中,“至少一个”是指一个或多个,其中,多个是指两个或两个以上。鉴于此,本申请实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,字符“/”,如无特殊说明,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。The lane line marking method in the embodiment of the present application is used to automatically mark the lane line that can directly avoid the obstacles in the intersection in the intersection of the point cloud map, without manual participation, so as to take into account the marking efficiency of the lane line and the Label quality. The present application will be described in further detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be understood that the specific operation methods in the method embodiments may also be applied to the apparatus embodiments or the system embodiments. It should be noted that, in the description of this application, "at least one" refers to one or more, wherein, a plurality refers to two or more. In view of this, in the embodiments of the present application, "a plurality" may also be understood as "at least two". "And/or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/", unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
需要理解的是,在本申请的描述中,“第一”和“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性。例如,“第一车道线”是拟确定的车道线,而“第二车道线”则是在第一车道线与障碍物的距离不满足预设的避障距离的情况下重新确定的车道线,这两个车道线只是在标注车道线的过程中先后确定的两条车道线,并不能理解为这两个车道线的优先级或重要程度的不同。It should be understood that, in the description of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are only used for the purpose of distinguishing and describing, and cannot be construed as indicating or implying relative importance. For example, the "first lane line" is the lane line to be determined, and the "second lane line" is the re-determined lane line when the distance between the first lane line and the obstacle does not meet the preset obstacle avoidance distance , these two lane lines are only two lane lines determined successively in the process of marking the lane lines, and cannot be understood as the difference in the priority or importance of the two lane lines.
另外,需要理解的是,在下文的描述中,只有“标注”才是真正地在点云地图上绘制,而“连接”、“拟合”、“绘制”、“延长”或“反向延长”等都不是真正地绘制,而只是为了最终的“标注”而做的预处理步骤。且,在下文的描述中,“拟合”是指用一条光滑的曲线将平面上一系列的点连接起来,常用的拟合方法包括但不限于:最小二乘曲线拟合法、多项式曲线拟合法、插值曲线拟合法、贝塞尔曲线拟合法或样条曲线拟合法等。In addition, it needs to be understood that in the following description, only "annotation" is actually drawn on the point cloud map, while "connection", "fitting", "drawing", "extending" or "reversely extending" ", etc. are not actually drawn, but just preprocessing steps for the final "labeling". Moreover, in the following description, "fitting" refers to connecting a series of points on the plane with a smooth curve, and commonly used fitting methods include but are not limited to: least squares curve fitting method, polynomial curve fitting method , interpolation curve fitting method, Bezier curve fitting method or spline curve fitting method, etc.
【实施例一】[Example 1]
图2示例性示出本申请实施例一提供的一种车道线标注方法的流程示意图,该方法适用于制图设备,例如图1所示意出的制图设备120。如图2所示,该流程包括如下步骤:FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application, and the method is applicable to a drawing device, such as the drawing device 120 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 2, the process includes the following steps:
步骤201,制图设备获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点。 Step 201, the mapping device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection.
本申请实施例中,驶入点和驶出点具体可以是针对于路口来说的,例如图3示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种驶入点和驶出点的几种可能情况:如图3中(A)所示,当前路口为十字型路口,驶入点I可以是采集车辆驶入该十字型路口的入口点,驶出点可以是采集车辆驶出该十字型路口的出口点,例如可以直行出口点O
1,也可以是左转出口点O
2,还可以是右转出口点O
3;如图3中(B)所示,当前路口为Y字型路口,驶入点可以是采集车辆驶入该Y字型路口的入口点,例如可以是Y字型左侧支路上的入口点I
1,也可以是 Y字型右侧支路上的入口点I
2,驶出点O可以是采集车辆驶出该Y字型路口的出口点;或者,如图3中(C)所示,当前路口为L字型路口,驶入点I可以是采集车辆驶入该L字型路口的入口点,驶出点O可以是采集车辆驶出该L字型路口的出口点;又或者,如图3中(D)所示,当前路口为T字型路口,驶入点I可以是采集车辆驶入该T字型路口的入口点,驶出点可以是采集车辆驶出该T字型路口的出口点,例如可以是直行出口点O
1,也可以是右转出口点O
3;还或者,如图3中(E)所示,当前路口为Z字型路口,驶入点I可以是采集车辆驶入该Z字型路口的入口点,驶出点O可以是采集车辆驶出该Z字型路口的出口点;还或者,如图3中(F)所示,当前路口为180°急转路口,驶入点I可以是采集车辆驶入该180°急转路口的入口点,驶出点O可以是采集车辆驶出该180°急转路口的出口点。应理解,驶入点和驶出点在不同路口场景中的可能情况还有很多,此处不再一一列举。
In the embodiment of the present application, the entry point and the exit point may be specific to the intersection. For example, FIG. 3 exemplarily shows several possible situations of the entry point and the exit point provided by the embodiment of the present application. : As shown in (A) in Figure 3, the current intersection is a cross-type intersection, the entry point I can be the entry point where the collection vehicle enters the cross-type intersection, and the exit point can be the point where the collection vehicle leaves the cross-type intersection. The exit point, for example, can go straight to the exit point O 1 , or it can be the left-turn exit point O 2 , or it can be the right-turn exit point O 3 ; as shown in (B) in Figure 3, the current intersection is a Y-shaped intersection. The entry point can be the entry point where the collected vehicle enters the Y-shaped intersection, for example, it can be the entry point I 1 on the left side branch of the Y shape, or it can be the entry point I 2 on the right side branch of the Y shape. The exit point O may be the exit point at which the collection vehicle drives out of the Y-shaped intersection; or, as shown in (C) in FIG. 3 , the current intersection is an L-shaped intersection, and the entry point I may be the collection vehicle entering the L-shaped intersection. The entry point of the junction, the exit point O can be the exit point of the collected vehicle exiting the L-shaped junction; or, as shown in (D) in Figure 3, the current junction is a T-shaped junction, and the entry point I can be the entry point where the vehicle enters the T-shaped intersection, and the exit point can be the exit point where the vehicle drives out of the T-shaped intersection, for example, it can be the straight exit point O 1 , or the exit point of turning right O 3 ; Or, as shown in (E) in FIG. 3 , the current intersection is a Z-shaped intersection, the entry point I can be the entry point of the collection vehicle entering the Z-shaped intersection, and the exit point O can be collected The vehicle exits the exit point of the Z-shaped intersection; or, as shown in (F) in Figure 3, the current intersection is a 180° sharp turn intersection, and the entry point I can be the collection vehicle entering the 180° sharp turn intersection. The entry point of , and the exit point O can be the exit point of the collecting vehicle exiting the 180° sharp turn intersection. It should be understood that there are many possible situations of the entry point and the exit point in different intersection scenarios, which will not be listed here.
应理解,虽然本申请实施例中的驶入点和驶出点是针对于路口来说的,但本申请所示出的车道线标注方案也可以应用于非路口,例如也可以应用于某一段车道,本申请对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that although the entry point and the exit point in the embodiments of this application are for intersections, the lane marking scheme shown in this application can also be applied to non-intersections, for example, can also be applied to a certain segment Lane, which is not specifically limited in this application.
步骤202,制图设备确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线。Step 202, the mapping device determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point.
在上述步骤202中,第一车道线可以对应为两侧车道边线中的其中一种,也可以对应为两侧车道边线所构成的区域内的车道线中的任一种,如车道中心线。在实施中,制图设备可以根据驶入点和驶出点确定出一条或多条第一车道线,一条或多条第一车道线中的每一条第一车道线都可以通过如下方式确定:In the above step 202, the first lane line may correspond to one of the lane edges on both sides, or may correspond to any one of the lane lines in the area formed by the lane edge lines on both sides, such as the lane center line. In implementation, the mapping device may determine one or more first lane lines according to the entry point and the exit point, and each of the one or more first lane lines may be determined in the following manner:
方式一,在驶出方向与驶入方向重合时,当前车道可能为如3中(A)或如图3中(D)所示意的路口直行车道,制图设备可以直接通过直线连接驶入点和驶出点,以获得第一车道线,此时的第一车道线为直线车道线。Method 1: When the exit direction coincides with the entry direction, the current lane may be the straight lane at the intersection as shown in (A) in Figure 3 or (D) in Figure 3, and the mapping device can directly connect the entry point and Exit point to obtain the first lane line, the first lane line at this time is a straight lane line.
方式二,在驶出方向与驶入方向平行但不重合时,当前车道可能为如图3中(E)所示意的右转急转弯车道、或如图3中(F)所示意的左转急转弯车道,制图设备可以直接通过直线或曲线连接驶入点和驶出点,以获得第一车道线,此时的第一车道线为直线车道线或曲线车道线。示例性地,考虑到直线连接驶入点和驶出点可能会使第一车道线与车道边界相交,导致第一车道线不可用,因此优选地可以通过位于车道内部的曲线连接驶入点和驶出点,以降低第一车道线与车道边界相交的概率。Method 2: When the outgoing direction is parallel to the incoming direction but not coincident, the current lane may be a right turn sharp turn lane as shown in (E) in Figure 3, or a left turn as shown in (F) in Figure 3 For sharp turning lanes, the drawing equipment can directly connect the entry point and the exit point through a straight line or a curve to obtain the first lane line, and the first lane line at this time is a straight lane line or a curved lane line. Illustratively, considering that connecting the entry point and the exit point in a straight line may make the first lane line intersect the lane boundary, rendering the first lane line unavailable, it is preferable to connect the entry point and the exit point by a curve located inside the lane. Exit point to reduce the probability that the first lane line intersects the lane boundary.
方式三,在驶出方向与驶入方向不平行时,当前车道可能为如图3中(A)、图3中(B)、或图3中(C)或如图3中(D)所示意的左转车道或右转车道,车辆在当前车道向左转弯或向右转弯。以图3中(A)所示意的十字型路口左转场景为例,制图设备可以先自驶入点I沿着驶入方向延长得到虚拟驶入线(L
1),自驶出点O
2沿着驶出方向的反方向延长得到虚拟驶出线(L
2),确定虚拟驶入线L
1与虚拟驶出线L
2的交点(P),然后根据驶入点I、交点P和驶出点O
2,拟合得到第一车道线。其中,拟合方式包括但不限于:在驶入点I、交点P和驶出点O
2所构成的区域内随机绘制直线或曲线;根据驶入点I、交点P和驶出点O
2绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线;在驶入点I、交点P和驶出点O
2所构成的区域内随机选择W个控制点,根据驶入点I、W个控制点和驶出点O
2绘制W+1阶贝塞尔曲线或W+1阶样条曲线,W为正整数。优选的,W个控制点可以尽量选择位于障碍物以外的点,以便提高第一车道线与障碍物不相交的概率。
Mode 3, when the exit direction is not parallel to the entry direction, the current lane may be as shown in Figure 3 (A), Figure 3 (B), or Figure 3 (C) or Figure 3 (D) Indicated left-turn lane or right-turn lane, the vehicle turns left or right in the current lane. Taking the left-turn scene at an intersection as shown in (A) in FIG. 3 as an example, the drawing device can first extend from the entry point I along the entry direction to obtain a virtual entry line (L 1 ), and from the exit point O 2 Extend along the opposite direction of the exit direction to obtain the virtual exit line (L 2 ), determine the intersection (P) of the virtual entry line L 1 and the virtual exit line L 2 , and then according to the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point Out of point O 2 , the first lane line is obtained by fitting. Wherein, the fitting method includes but is not limited to: randomly drawing a straight line or curve in the area formed by the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point O 2 ; drawing according to the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point O 2 Second-order Bezier curve or second-order spline curve; randomly select W control points in the area formed by the entry point I, the intersection point P and the exit point O 2 , according to the entry point I, W control points and Drive out point O 2 to draw a Bezier curve of order W+1 or a spline curve of order W+1, where W is a positive integer. Preferably, the W control points may be selected as far as possible outside the obstacle, so as to increase the probability that the first lane line does not intersect the obstacle.
需要说明的是,上述内容只是示例性介绍几种确定第一车道线的方式,凡是能根据驶 入点和驶出点拟确定出一条或多条从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线的方式,都在本申请的保护范围内,本申请对此不再一一列举。It should be noted that the above content is only an example to introduce several ways of determining the first lane line. Any one or more first lanes that can be moved from the entry point to the exit point can be determined according to the entry point and the exit point. The ways of lane lines are all within the protection scope of this application, and this application will not list them one by one.
步骤203,制图设备判断第一车道线与路口中的障碍物的最小距离是否大于或等于预设的避障距离,若否,则执行步骤204,若是,则执行步骤206。Step 203: The mapping device determines whether the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle in the intersection is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在上述步骤203中,制图设备可以计算所确定出的一条或多条第一车道线中的每条第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离,当一条或多条第一车道线中存在至少一条第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离时,意味着一条或多条第一车道线中存在能安全避开障碍物的目标第一车道线,因此制图设备可以按照如下步骤206中的方式将目标第一车道线标注在地图上,当一条或多条第一车道线中的全部第一车道线与障碍物的距离都不大于或等于预设的避障距离时,意味着一条或多条第一车道线都不能安全避开障碍物,因此制图设备可以按照如下步骤204至步骤205中的方式重新确定出能安全避开障碍物的第二车道线。In the above step 203, the mapping device may calculate the minimum distance between each of the determined one or more first lane lines and the obstacle, when there is at least one of the one or more first lane lines When the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, it means that there is a target first lane line that can safely avoid the obstacle in one or more first lane lines, so the mapping equipment can Mark the target first lane line on the map in the following manner in step 206, when the distance between all the first lane lines in one or more first lane lines and the obstacle is not greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance , it means that one or more of the first lane lines cannot safely avoid obstacles, so the mapping device can re-determine the second lane lines that can safely avoid obstacles according to the following steps 204 to 205 .
本申请实施例中,一条第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离,可以包含如下内容中的任意一项:当第一车道线为靠近障碍物一侧的车道边线(也称为临界边线)时,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的最小避障间距;当第一车道线为远离障碍物一侧的车道边线时,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的最小避障间距与预设的车道宽度之和;当第一车道线为车道中心线时,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的最小避障间距与1/2倍的预设的车道宽度之和。其中,预设的最小避障间距用于指示车辆行驶过程中与障碍物的最小间隔距离,可以设置为大于或等于0的一个值。当预设的最小避障间距为0时,也即是,地图要求行车区域与障碍物不相交。当预设的最小避障间距大于0时,也即是,地图不仅要求行车区域与障碍物不相交,还要求行车区域的临界边线与障碍物间隔一定的安全距离。In the embodiment of the present application, the minimum distance between a first lane line and an obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and may include any one of the following: when the first lane line is a lane close to the obstacle When the edge (also called the critical edge), the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance; when the first lane line is the lane edge on the side away from the obstacle, the first lane The minimum distance between the line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the sum of the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance and the preset lane width; when the first lane line is the lane centerline, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to The sum of the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance and 1/2 times the preset lane width. Wherein, the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is used to indicate the minimum distance between the vehicle and the obstacle during driving, and can be set to a value greater than or equal to 0. When the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is 0, that is, the map requires that the driving area does not intersect with obstacles. When the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is greater than 0, that is, the map not only requires that the driving area and obstacles do not intersect, but also requires that the critical edge of the driving area and obstacles are separated by a certain safe distance.
与上述内容对应的,一条第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不大于或等于预设的避障距离,可以包含如下内容中的任意一项:在预设的最小避障间距为0的情况下,第一车道线与障碍物相交;或在预设的避障间距大于0的情况下,第一车道线与障碍物相交,或第一车道线与障碍物不相交但第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离。Corresponding to the above content, the minimum distance between a first lane line and an obstacle is not greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which may include any of the following: In the case where the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is 0 The first lane line intersects the obstacle; or when the preset obstacle avoidance distance is greater than 0, the first lane line intersects the obstacle, or the first lane line does not intersect the obstacle but the first lane line and The minimum distance of obstacles is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
示例来说,继续参照图3中(A)所示,假设预设的最小避障间距为30厘米,预设的车道宽度为750厘米,则在路口中的障碍物的左侧避让的情况下:左转车道的右侧车道边线为临界边线,右侧车道边线与障碍物的最小距离应该大于或等于30厘米,如果拟确定的第一右侧车道边线与障碍物相交,或与障碍物的距离小于30厘米,则需要重新确定第二右侧车道边线;左侧车道边线与障碍物的最小距离应该大于或等于780厘米(即30厘米+750厘米),如果拟确定的第一左侧车道边线与障碍物相交,或与障碍物的距离小于780厘米,则需要重新确定第二左侧车道边线;中心车道线与障碍物的最小距离应该大于或等于405厘米(即30厘米+750/2厘米),如果拟确定的第一中心车道线与障碍物相交,或与障碍物的距离小于405厘米,则需要重新确定第二中心车道线。在路口中的障碍物的右侧避让的情况下:左转车道的左侧车道边线为临界边线,即左侧车道边线与障碍物的最小距离应该大于或等于30厘米,如果拟确定的第一左侧车道边线与障碍物相交,或与障碍物的距离小于30厘米,则需要重新确定第二左侧车道边线;右侧车道边线与障碍物的最小距离应该大于或等于780厘米(即30厘米+750厘米),如果拟确定的第一右侧车道边线与障碍物相交,或与障碍物的距离小于780厘米,则需要重新确定第二右侧车道边线;中心 车道线与障碍物的最小距离应该大于或等于405厘米(即30厘米+750/2厘米),如果拟确定的第一中心车道线与障碍物相交,或与障碍物的距离小于405厘米,则需要重新确定第二中心车道线。For example, continue to refer to (A) in Figure 3, assuming that the preset minimum obstacle avoidance distance is 30 cm, and the preset lane width is 750 cm, in the case of avoiding the left side of the obstacle in the intersection : The right lane edge of the left-turn lane is a critical edge, and the minimum distance between the right lane edge and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 30 cm. If the distance is less than 30 cm, you need to re-determine the second right lane edge; the minimum distance between the left lane edge and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 780 cm (ie 30 cm + 750 cm), if the first left lane to be determined If the sideline intersects with the obstacle, or the distance from the obstacle is less than 780cm, the sideline of the second left lane needs to be re-determined; the minimum distance between the center lane line and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 405cm (ie 30cm+750/2 cm), if the first center lane line to be determined intersects with the obstacle, or the distance from the obstacle is less than 405 cm, the second center lane line needs to be re-determined. In the case of the right side avoidance of the obstacle in the intersection: the left lane edge of the left turn lane is the critical edge, that is, the minimum distance between the left lane edge and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 30 cm. If the left lane edge intersects the obstacle, or the distance to the obstacle is less than 30 cm, the second left lane edge needs to be re-determined; the minimum distance between the right lane edge and the obstacle should be greater than or equal to 780 cm (that is, 30 cm). +750 cm), if the first right lane edge to be determined intersects the obstacle, or the distance to the obstacle is less than 780 cm, the second right lane edge needs to be re-determined; the minimum distance between the center lane line and the obstacle Should be greater than or equal to 405 cm (ie 30 cm + 750/2 cm), if the first center lane line to be determined intersects with the obstacle, or the distance from the obstacle is less than 405 cm, the second center lane line needs to be re-determined .
步骤204,制图设备从第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点确定第二车道线,第二车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离。 Step 204, the drawing device selects one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and selects at least one control in the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance. point, the second lane line is determined according to the entry point, at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在上述步骤204中,目标避障区域可以从第一车道线的两侧区域中随机选择,也可以是第一车道线的两侧区域中更远离障碍物的一侧,以便能在第一车道线所偏向的一侧重新快速确定出第二车道线,当然还可以由障碍物进行指示,具体不作限定。通过在路口中选择与障碍物的距离大于预设的避障距离的点作为控制点,有助于提高一次确定出满足避障要求的第二车道线的成功概率,减少重新确定第二车道线的次数。关于确定第二车道线的具体实现过程,请参照如下实施例三,此处先不作具体介绍。In the above step 204, the target obstacle avoidance area may be randomly selected from the areas on both sides of the first lane line, or may be the side farther away from the obstacle in the areas on both sides of the first lane line, so as to be able to avoid obstacles in the first lane The side to which the line is deviated can quickly determine the second lane line again. Of course, it can also be indicated by an obstacle, which is not limited in detail. By selecting the point at the intersection with the distance from the obstacle greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance as the control point, it helps to improve the success probability of determining the second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance requirements at one time, and reduces the need to re-determine the second lane line. number of times. For the specific implementation process of determining the second lane line, please refer to the third embodiment below, which will not be described in detail here.
应理解,在路口中选择控制点来重新确定第二车道线,只是一种可选地实施方式。在另一种可选地实施方式中,制图设备还可以向着第一车道线的某一侧区域偏移第一车道线,直至偏移后的第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离时,将偏移后的第一车道线作为第二车道线。其中,偏移第一车道线可以是指偏移驶入点和驶出点之间的整条第一车道线,也可以是指仅偏移第一车道线上的与障碍物相交或距离小于预设的避障距离的那部分第一车道线,具体不作限定。It should be understood that selecting a control point in the intersection to redefine the second lane line is only an optional implementation. In another optional embodiment, the mapping device may further offset the first lane line toward a certain side area of the first lane line, until the minimum distance between the offset first lane line and the obstacle is not less than a predetermined distance. When the obstacle avoidance distance is set, the first lane line after the offset is used as the second lane line. Wherein, offsetting the first lane line may refer to offsetting the entire first lane line between the entry point and the exit point, or it may refer to only offsetting the intersecting or distance less than the obstacle on the first lane line The part of the first lane line of the preset obstacle avoidance distance is not specifically limited.
步骤205,制图设备在地图上标注第二车道线。 Step 205, the mapping device marks the second lane line on the map.
示例性地,制图设备在确定第二车道线后,还可以根据预设的车道宽度确定出第二车道线以外的其它车道边线或车道中心线,并将第二车道线、其它车道边线和车道中心线都标注在地图上。举例来说,继续参照图3中(A)所示,假设第二车道线为车道中心线,则制图设备在确定第二车道线后,还可以将第二车道线向第二车道线的左侧平移1/2倍的预设的车道宽度(并作一定的调整)以得到左侧车道边线,以及将第二车道线向第二车道线的右侧平移1/2倍的预设的车道宽度(并作一定的调整)以得到右侧车道边线,将第二车道线、左侧车道边线和右侧车道边线都标注在地图上。或者,在根据一个或多个控制点重新拟合得到第二车道线的情况下,制图设备还可以将一个或多个控制点向左侧平移1/2倍的预设的车道宽度以获得左侧车道边线对应的一个或多个控制点,根据左侧车道线对应的驶入点、一个或多个控制点和驶出点拟合得到左侧车道边线,以及将一个或多个控制点向右侧平移1/2倍的预设的车道宽度确定出右侧车道边线对应的一个或多个控制点,根据右侧车道线对应的驶入点、一个或多个控制点和驶出点拟合得到右侧车道边线,将第一车道线、左侧车道边线和右侧车道边线都标注在地图上。Exemplarily, after determining the second lane line, the mapping device may further determine other lane edges or lane center lines other than the second lane line according to the preset lane width, and map the second lane line, the other lane edges and the lane to the lane line. Centerlines are marked on the map. For example, continuing to refer to (A) in FIG. 3 , assuming that the second lane line is the center line of the lane, after determining the second lane line, the drawing device can also move the second lane line to the left of the second lane line. Side shift 1/2 times the preset lane width (with some adjustments) to get the left lane edge, and shift the second lane line to the right of the second lane line 1/2 times the preset lane Width (and make some adjustments) to get the right lane edge, label the second lane edge, the left lane edge and the right lane edge on the map. Alternatively, in the case where the second lane line is obtained by re-fitting according to one or more control points, the drawing device may also shift one or more control points to the left by 1/2 times the preset lane width to obtain the left One or more control points corresponding to the side lane edge, the left lane edge is obtained by fitting the entry point, one or more control points and exit points corresponding to the left lane line, and the one or more control points are fitted to the left lane edge. One or more control points corresponding to the edge of the right lane are determined by shifting the preset lane width by 1/2 times to the right. Combined to get the right lane edge, mark the first lane edge, left lane edge and right lane edge on the map.
步骤206,制图设备在地图上标注第一车道线。Step 206, the mapping device marks the first lane line on the map.
在上述步骤206中,当制图设备所确定出的一条或多条第一车道线中存在至少两条第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离都大于或等于预设的避障距离时,制图设备可以随机或按照某种规则从至少两条第一车道线中选择其中一条作为目标第一车道线,根据目标第一车道线和预设的车道宽度确定其它车道边线或车道中心线后,将目标第一车道线、其它车道边线和车道中心线一起标注在地图上。关于选择目标第一车道线的具体实现过程请参照如下实施例二,此处先不作介绍。In the above step 206, when the minimum distance between at least two of the first lane lines and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance among the one or more first lane lines determined by the mapping device, the mapping device One of the at least two first lane lines can be selected randomly or according to certain rules as the target first lane line. The first lane line, the other lane edges and the lane center line are marked on the map together. For the specific implementation process of selecting the target first lane line, please refer to the second embodiment below, which will not be introduced here.
在上述实施例一中,通过在拟确定的第一车道线无法安全绕开障碍物的情况下重新确定能安全绕开障碍物的第二车道线,有助于直接在地图上标注出具有准确避障能力的第二车道线,该方式既不需要依赖人工标注,也不需要人为二次调整,能有效提高车道线的标注质量和标注效率。更进一步的,在第一车道线不满足标注要求的情况下,通过在第一车道线的一侧区域内选择与障碍物的距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的控制点,作为确定第二车道线的基准,还能提高确定出满足避障距离要求的第二车道线的概率,提高标注车道线的成功率。In the above-mentioned first embodiment, by re-determining the second lane line that can safely avoid the obstacle when the first lane line to be determined cannot safely avoid the obstacle, it is helpful to directly mark on the map with accurate information. The second lane line of the obstacle avoidance ability does not need to rely on manual labeling, nor does it require manual secondary adjustment, which can effectively improve the labeling quality and labeling efficiency of the lane line. Further, in the case where the first lane line does not meet the labeling requirements, a control point whose distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected as the determination of the first lane line in one side area of the first lane line. The benchmark of the second lane line can also improve the probability of determining the second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance distance requirement, and improve the success rate of marking the lane line.
需要说明的是,上述实施例一仅是以普通障碍物为例进行介绍。在另一种可选地实施方式中,障碍物还可能是具有交规指示功能的障碍物,具有交规指示功能的障碍物指示车辆在目标避障区域一侧避让障碍物。也即是说,地图上标注的车道线还需要位于目标避障区域一侧。在这种情况下,制图设备还可以结合障碍物的类型完成上述实施例一中的车道线标注方案,具体实现过程包括如下任一内容:It should be noted that, the above-mentioned first embodiment is only described by taking a common obstacle as an example. In another optional implementation, the obstacle may also be an obstacle with a traffic regulation indication function, and the obstacle with a traffic regulation indication function instructs the vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area. That is to say, the lane line marked on the map also needs to be located on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area. In this case, the mapping device can also complete the lane marking scheme in the first embodiment above in combination with the type of obstacles, and the specific implementation process includes any of the following:
方案一,制图设备先识别障碍物的类型,如果是具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则:在交规指示功能的障碍物所指示的目标避障区域一侧确定第一车道线,当第一车道线与障碍物相交或与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离时,在目标避障区域一侧重新确定出与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线;当第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离时,直接在地图上标注第一车道线。如果是普通障碍物,则:随机确定第一车道线,并判断第一车道线与障碍物是否相交或与障碍物的最小距离是否小于预设的避障距离,若存在一项为是,则在第一车道线的两侧区域中的其中一侧区域内重新确定出与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线,若两项都为否,则直接在地图上标注第一车道线。Scheme 1, the mapping equipment first identifies the type of the obstacle. If it is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, then: determine the first lane line on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic regulation indication function. When the line intersects with the obstacle or the minimum distance to the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, re-determine the second lane with the minimum distance to the obstacle greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area Line, and mark the second lane line on the map; when the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, directly mark the first lane line on the map. If it is a common obstacle, then: randomly determine the first lane line, and judge whether the first lane line intersects with the obstacle or whether the minimum distance to the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if there is one that is yes, then In one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line, a second lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance is re-determined, and the second lane line is marked on the map, If both items are negative, mark the first lane line directly on the map.
方案二,制图设备先随机拟合第一车道线,再识别障碍物的类型,如果是具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则:判断第一车道线是否位于目标避障区域一侧且与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离,若是,则在地图上标注第一车道线,若否,则在目标避障区域一侧重新确定出与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线。如果是普通障碍物,则:判断第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离是否大于或等于预设的避障距离,若否,则在第一车道线的两侧区域中的其中一侧区域内重新确定出与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线,若是,则在地图上标注第一车道线。Option 2: The mapping equipment first randomly fits the first lane line, and then identifies the type of the obstacle. If it is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, then: determine whether the first lane line is located on the side of the target obstacle avoidance area and is in line with the obstacle. If the minimum distance is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if so, mark the first lane line on the map; The second lane line of the obstacle avoidance distance, and mark the second lane line on the map. If it is a common obstacle, then: judge whether the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if not, then in one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line Re-determine the second lane line whose minimum distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and mark the second lane line on the map. If so, mark the first lane line on the map.
下面以上述方案二为例,基于实施例二和实施例三进一步介绍车道线标注方法的具体实现过程。The following takes the above solution 2 as an example, and further introduces the specific implementation process of the lane marking method based on the second embodiment and the third embodiment.
【实施例二】[Example 2]
图4示例性示出本申请实施例二提供的一种车道线标注方法的流程示意图,该方法适用于制图设备,例如图1所示意出的制图设备120。如图4所示,该流程包括如下步骤:FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application, and the method is applicable to a drawing device, such as the drawing device 120 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 4, the process includes the following steps:
步骤401,制图设备获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点。 Step 401, the mapping device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection.
步骤402,制图设备在路口中选择至少两个控制点,根据驶入点、驶出点和至少两个控制点,确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的Q条第一车道线,Q为大于或等于2的整数,Q条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线使用的控制点不同。 Step 402, the mapping device selects at least two control points in the intersection, and determines Q first lane lines moving from the entry point to the exit point according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, where Q is: An integer greater than or equal to 2, any two of the Q first lane lines use different control points.
示例性地,制图设备可以从路口中随机选择Q个控制点,根据驶入点、Q个控制点中的每个控制点和驶出点绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,以得到Q条第一车道线。其中,控制点可以尽量多选择一些,例如一次选择5个或5个以上,且还可以尽量选择与障碍物边缘的距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的点,以便尽可能拟合出满足预设的避障距离要求的第一车道线,提高车道线的标注效率。另外,考虑到最终标注的车道线还要与障碍物的类型相匹配,因此还可以尽量让Q条第一车道线均匀分布在障碍物的两侧区域中,以提高从Q条第一车道线中选择出满足任一类型障碍物所指示的目标避障区域的目标第一车道线的概率,降低重新确定第二车道线的概率,进一步提高车道线的标注效率。Exemplarily, the mapping device may randomly select Q control points from the intersection, and draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the entry point, each of the Q control points, and the exit point, to get Q first lane lines. Among them, you can choose as many control points as possible, for example, choose 5 or more at a time, and you can also try to choose points whose distance from the edge of the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, so as to fit as much as possible to meet the requirements. The first lane line required by the preset obstacle avoidance distance improves the efficiency of lane marking. In addition, considering that the final marked lane lines should match the type of obstacles, it is also possible to make the Q first lane lines evenly distributed in the areas on both sides of the obstacle to improve the distance from the Q first lane lines. The probability of selecting the target first lane line that satisfies the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by any type of obstacles reduces the probability of re-determining the second lane line, and further improves the labeling efficiency of the lane line.
举例来说,图5示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种左转车道线的制图流程示意图,如参照图5所示,该示例中的左转车道线对应为左转车道的右侧车道边线。在实施中,制图设备可以先从驶入点I沿着驶入方向绘制虚拟驶入线L
1,从驶出点O沿着驶出方向的反方向绘制虚拟驶出线L
2,将虚拟驶入线L
1和虚拟驶出线L
2的交点P作为一个控制点,根据驶入点I、控制点P和驶出点O绘制得到第一车道线K
11。然后,制图设备可以从第一车道线K
11的两侧随机选择控制点绘制其它第一车道线,例如从第一车道线K
11的左侧随机选择三个控制点,根据驶入点I、这三个控制点和驶出点O分别绘制得到第一车道线K
12、第一车道线K
13和第一车道线K
14,从第一车道线K
11的右侧随机选择两个控制点,根据驶入点I、这两个控制点和驶出点O分别绘制得到第一车道线K
15和第一车道线K
16。至此,制图设备共绘制出6条第一车道线K
11~K
16。
For example, FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a drawing of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5 , the left-turn lane line in this example corresponds to the right side of the left-turn lane lane edge. In implementation, the drawing device may first draw a virtual drive-in line L 1 along the drive-in direction from the drive-in point I, draw a virtual drive-in line L 2 from the drive-out point O along the opposite direction of the drive-out direction, and draw the virtual drive-in line L 2 along the opposite direction of the drive-out direction from the drive-in point O. The intersection P of the incoming line L 1 and the virtual outgoing line L 2 is used as a control point, and the first lane line K 11 is obtained by drawing according to the incoming point I, the control point P and the outgoing point O. Then, the drawing device can randomly select control points from both sides of the first lane line K 11 to draw other first lane lines, for example, randomly select three control points from the left side of the first lane line K 11 , according to the entry point I, The three control points and the exit point O are drawn respectively to obtain the first lane line K 12 , the first lane line K 13 and the first lane line K 14 , and two control points are randomly selected from the right side of the first lane line K 11 , and draw the first lane line K 15 and the first lane line K 16 according to the entry point I, the two control points and the exit point O, respectively. So far, the drawing equipment has drawn a total of 6 first lane lines K 11 to K 16 .
步骤403,制图设备确定路口中的障碍物的类型: Step 403, the mapping device determines the type of obstacles in the intersection:
若路口中的障碍物是具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则执行步骤404;If the obstacle in the intersection is an obstacle with a traffic regulation indication function, go to step 404;
若路口中的障碍物是不具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则执行步骤405。If the obstacle in the intersection is an obstacle that does not have the function of traffic regulation indication, step 405 is executed.
步骤404,制图设备判断具有交规指示功能的障碍物所指示的目标避障区域内是否存在与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,目标第一车道线属于Q条第一车道线,若是,则执行步骤406,若否,则执行步骤407。 Step 404, the mapping device determines whether there is a target first lane line whose minimum distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic regulation indication function, and the target first lane line belongs to the target obstacle avoidance area. There are Q first lane lines, if yes, go to step 406 , if not, go to step 407 .
在上述步骤403和步骤404中,具有交规指示功能的障碍物例如可以包括交通圈、岗亭、环形圈或环岛等。例如,交通圈通常指示待左转的车辆在交通圈的左侧左转,指示待右转的车辆在交通圈的右侧右转:如果第一车道线对应为左转车道线,则制图设备可以从Q条第一车道线中选择位于障碍物左侧且与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第一车道线,作为目标第一车道线;如果第一车道线对应为右转车道线,则制图设备可以从Q条第一车道线中选择位于障碍物右侧且与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第一车道线,作为目标第一车道线。又例如,环岛指示车辆绕环岛沿逆时针方向单向行驶至出口处驶出,因此无论第一车道线为左转车道线、右转车道线还是直行车道线,制图设备都需要从Q条第一车道线中选择位于障碍物右侧且与障碍物的最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第一车道线,作为目标第一车道线。In the above-mentioned steps 403 and 404 , the obstacles having the function of traffic regulation indication may include, for example, traffic circles, guard boxes, circular circles, roundabouts, and the like. For example, a traffic circle usually instructs a vehicle to turn left to turn left on the left side of the traffic circle, and a vehicle to turn right to turn right on the right side of the traffic circle: if the first lane line corresponds to the left-turn lane line, the mapping device The first lane line located on the left side of the obstacle and the minimum distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance can be selected from the Q first lane lines as the target first lane line; if the first lane line corresponds to For the right-turn lane line, the mapping device can select the first lane line on the right side of the obstacle and the minimum distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance from the Q first lane lines, as the target first. lane line. For another example, the roundabout instructs the vehicle to go around the roundabout in one direction in a counterclockwise direction to the exit, so no matter whether the first lane line is the left-turn lane line, the right-turn lane line or the straight lane line, the mapping equipment needs to start from the Q-th From a lane line, the first lane line located on the right side of the obstacle and the minimum distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance is selected as the target first lane line.
示例性地,继续参照图5所示,在6条第一车道线中,第一车道线K
11、第一车道线K
12和第一车道线K
15都与障碍物相交,这三条第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离必然小于预设的避障距离,因此制图设备可以先排除这三条车道线。在剩余的三条第一车道线中,第一车道线K
13和第一车道线K
14位于障碍物左侧,第一车道线K
16位于障碍物右侧,假设第一车道线K
13与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,而第一车道线K
14和第一车道线K
16与障碍物的最小距离大于预设的避障距离,则:当障碍物为交通圈时,由于第一车道 线为左转车道线,因此制图设备可以从位于障碍物左侧的第一车道线K
13和第一车道线K
14中选择出与障碍物的最小距离大于预设的避障距离的第一车道线K
14作为目标第一车道线;当障碍物为环岛时,制图设备可以将位于障碍物右侧且与障碍物的最小距离大于预设的避障距离的第一车道线K
16作为目标第一车道线。
Exemplarily, continuing to refer to FIG. 5 , among the six first lane lines, the first lane line K 11 , the first lane line K 12 and the first lane line K 15 all intersect with obstacles, and the three first lane lines K 11 , K 12 and K 15 all intersect with obstacles. The minimum distance between the lane line and the obstacle must be smaller than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, so the mapping equipment can exclude these three lane lines first. Among the remaining three first lane lines, the first lane line K 13 and the first lane line K 14 are located on the left side of the obstacle, and the first lane line K 16 is located on the right side of the obstacle, assuming that the first lane line K 13 is connected to the obstacle The minimum distance of the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the minimum distance between the first lane line K 14 and the first lane line K 16 and the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, then: when the obstacle is a traffic circle, Since the first lane line is a left-turn lane line, the mapping device can select from the first lane line K 13 and the first lane line K 14 located on the left side of the obstacle that the minimum distance to the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance The first lane line K 14 of the distance is used as the target first lane line; when the obstacle is a roundabout, the mapping device can set the first lane line on the right side of the obstacle and the minimum distance to the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance. K 16 as the target first lane line.
步骤405,制图设备判断Q条第一车道线中是否存在与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,若是,则执行步骤406,若否,则执行步骤407。 Step 405, the mapping device determines whether there is a target first lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance in the Q first lane lines, if yes, go to step 406, if not, go to step 407 .
在上述步骤403和步骤405中,不具有交规指示功能的障碍物例如可以包括妨碍车辆行驶的普通障碍物、禁止车辆行驶的中心圈、道路标线或高速围栏等,车辆在行驶过程中只需要绕开这些障碍物即可,而可以不考虑绕开的方向。在这种情况下,继续参照图5所示,制图设备可以先排除与障碍物相交的第一车道线K
11、K
12和K
15,再分别计算剩余的三条第一车道线K
13、K
14和K
16与障碍物的最小距离,并对比计算出的三个最小距离和预设的避障距离,发现第一车道线K
14与障碍物的最小距离和第一车道线K
16与障碍物的最小距离都大于预设的避障距离,而第一车道线K
13与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,因此制图设备可以从第一车道线K
14和第一车道线K
16中选择目标第一车道线。
In the above steps 403 and 405, the obstacles that do not have the function of traffic regulations may include, for example, ordinary obstacles that hinder the driving of vehicles, central circles that prohibit vehicles from driving, road markings or high-speed fences, etc. It is enough to bypass these obstacles, regardless of the direction of the bypass. In this case, continuing to refer to FIG. 5 , the drawing device can first exclude the first lane lines K 11 , K 12 and K 15 that intersect with the obstacle, and then calculate the remaining three first lane lines K 13 , K respectively. 14 and K 16 and the minimum distance from the obstacle, and compare the calculated three minimum distances with the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and find the minimum distance between the first lane line K 14 and the obstacle and the first lane line K 16 and the obstacle The minimum distance of the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and the minimum distance between the first lane line K 13 and the obstacle is smaller than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, so the mapping equipment can be from the first lane line K 14 and the first lane line. Select the target first lane line in K 16 .
步骤406,制图设备在地图上标注目标第一车道线。 Step 406, the mapping device marks the target first lane line on the map.
在上述步骤406中,继续参照图5所示,假设确定出的目标车道线为第一车道线K
14,则该目标车道线实际对应为左转车道的右侧车道边线,为了在地图中标注出最详细最全面的车道线,制图设备还可以将第一车道线K
14向左侧平移预设的车道宽度,得到左转车道的左侧车道边线(图5中未进行示意),然后将左侧车道边线和第一车道线K
14都标注在地图上。或者,制图设备还可以根据左侧车道边线和第一车道线K
14,确定出该左转车道的中心车道线,将左侧车道边线、第一车道线K
14和中心车道线都标注在地图上。
In the above-mentioned step 406, referring to FIG. 5, it is assumed that the determined target lane line is the first lane line K 14 , then the target lane line actually corresponds to the right side lane of the left-turn lane. In order to mark it on the map To get the most detailed and comprehensive lane line, the mapping equipment can also translate the first lane line K 14 to the left by the preset lane width to obtain the left lane edge of the left-turn lane (not shown in Figure 5), and then set the The left lane edge and the first lane line K 14 are marked on the map. Alternatively, the mapping device may also determine the center lane line of the left-turn lane according to the left lane edge and the first lane line K 14 , and mark the left lane edge, the first lane line K 14 and the center lane line on the map superior.
在一种可选地实施方式中,如果上述步骤404中的目标避障区域内存在至少两条最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第一车道线,或者,上述步骤405中的Q条第一车道线中存在至少两条最小距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的第一车道线,则制图设备可以从至少两条第一车道线中选择一条合适的第一车道线作为目标第一车道线。其中,选择的方式包括但不限于:选择路程最短的一条第一车道线,以便车辆尽快绕过障碍物;选择距离障碍物最远的一条第一车道线,以进一步降低车辆在绕过障碍物的过程中碰撞到障碍物的风险;选择距离障碍物最近的一条第一车道线,以降低车辆在绕开障碍物的过程中与同侧或对侧车辆相撞的概率;随机选择一条第一车道线;选择位于中间的一条第一车道线等。应理解,本申请并不限定只采用如上几种选择方式,在实际操作中,制图设备还可以根据具体的交通情况决策采用何种选择方式。例如,在地图中双向车道的路口交汇处标注左转车道线时,制图设备还可以尽量选择位于障碍物右侧的第一车道线作为第二车道线,以降低车辆在左转过程中与对侧直行车辆碰撞的概率,提高左转的安全性。In an optional implementation manner, if there are at least two first lane lines with a minimum distance greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance in the target obstacle avoidance area in the above step 404, or, the Q in the above step 405 If there are at least two first lane lines whose minimum distance is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance among the first lane lines, the mapping device may select a suitable first lane line from the at least two first lane lines as the target first lane line. The selection methods include but are not limited to: selecting the first lane with the shortest distance, so that the vehicle can bypass the obstacle as soon as possible; The risk of colliding with obstacles in the process of avoiding obstacles; select the first lane line closest to the obstacle to reduce the probability of the vehicle colliding with the vehicle on the same side or the opposite side in the process of bypassing the obstacle; randomly select a first lane line Lane lines; select one of the first lane lines in the middle, etc. It should be understood that the present application is not limited to only adopting the above several selection methods, and in actual operation, the drawing device can also decide which selection method to adopt according to specific traffic conditions. For example, when marking the left-turn lane line at the intersection of the two-way lane in the map, the mapping device can also try to select the first lane line on the right side of the obstacle as the second lane line, so as to reduce the collision between the vehicle and the opposite lane during the left turn process. The probability of side-traveling vehicle collision is improved, and the safety of left turns is improved.
步骤407,制图设备重新确定第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线,其中,第二车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离。 Step 407 , the mapping device re-determines the second lane line, and marks the second lane line on the map, wherein the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
在实施中,如果上述步骤404中的目标避障区域内不存在第一车道线,或者上述步骤404中的目标避障区域内的全部第一车道线或者与障碍物相交、或者与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,或者上述步骤405中的Q条第一车道线或者与障碍物相交、或者与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,则制图设备可以将Q条第一车道线中的任一条第一车道线作为基准第一车道线,依赖基准第一车道线重新确定第二车道线。其中,基准第 一车道线可以尽量选取情况不恶劣的一条第一车道线,以便提高基准第一车道线的有效参照性。关于重新确定第二车道线的具体实现过程请参照下列实施例三,此处先不作介绍。In the implementation, if there is no first lane line in the target obstacle avoidance area in the above step 404, or all the first lane lines in the target obstacle avoidance area in the above step 404 either intersect with the obstacle, or The minimum distance is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, or the Q first lane lines in the above step 405 either intersect with the obstacle, or the minimum distance from the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, then the mapping device can Any one of the first lane lines is used as the reference first lane line, and the second lane line is re-determined depending on the reference first lane line. Among them, the reference first lane line can try to select a first lane line that is not in bad condition, so as to improve the effective reference of the reference first lane line. For the specific implementation process of re-determining the second lane line, please refer to the following third embodiment, which will not be introduced here.
在上述实施例二中,通过预先拟合出多条第一车道线,能提高制图设备从多条第一车道线中直接选择出满足要求的目标第一车道线的概率,而可以不再重新确定第二车道线,该方式不仅有助于提高车道线标注的效率,还能在地图中标注具有避障功能的目标第一车道线,有效提高车道线标注的质量和准确性。且,通过对不同类型的障碍物采用不同的标注方法,还能使地图上标注的目标第一车道线满足所对应障碍物的避障要求,有效提高地图标注的准确性。In the above-mentioned second embodiment, by pre-fitting a plurality of first lane lines, the probability that the drawing device can directly select a target first lane line that meets the requirements from the plurality of first lane lines can be improved, and there is no need to re- Determining the second lane line not only helps to improve the efficiency of lane line marking, but also marks the target first lane line with obstacle avoidance function in the map, which effectively improves the quality and accuracy of lane line marking. Moreover, by using different labeling methods for different types of obstacles, the target first lane line marked on the map can also meet the obstacle avoidance requirements of the corresponding obstacles, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of map labeling.
【实施例三】[Example 3]
图6示例性示出本申请实施例三提供的一种车道线标注方法的流程示意图,该方法适用于制图设备,例如图1所示意出的制图设备120。如图6所示,该流程包括如下步骤:FIG. 6 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a lane marking method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application, and the method is applicable to a drawing device, such as the drawing device 120 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 6, the process includes the following steps:
步骤601,制图设备获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点。 Step 601, the mapping device obtains the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection.
步骤602,制图设备确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线。 Step 602, the mapping device determines the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point.
在上述步骤602中,制图设备可以只拟合得到一条第一车道线。图7示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种左转车道线的制图流程示意图,如图7中(A)和图7中(B)所示,该示例中的第一车道线对应为左转车道的右侧车道边线。在实施中,制图设备可以先从驶入点I沿着驶入方向绘制虚拟驶入线L
1,从驶出点O沿着驶出方向的反方向绘制虚拟驶出线L
2,根据驶入点I、虚拟驶入线L
1和虚拟驶出线L
2的交点P和驶出点O绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,得到第一车道线K
1。需要说明的是,当障碍物所在的位置不同时,第一车道线K
1与障碍物的位置关系也可能不同,例如:图7中(A)所示意的障碍物J
1相比于图7中(B)所示意的障碍物J
2来说更偏左,这导致同一第一车道线K
1与图7中(A)所示意的障碍物J
1相交,而与图7中(B)所示意的障碍物J
2不相交。
In the above step 602, the drawing device may only obtain one first lane line by fitting. FIG. 7 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a drawing flowchart of a left-turn lane line provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7(A) and FIG. 7(B) , the first lane line in this example corresponds to The right lane edge of the left turn lane. In implementation, the drawing device may first draw a virtual entry line L 1 from the entry point I along the entry direction, and draw a virtual exit line L 2 from the exit point O along the opposite direction of the exit direction. Point I, the intersection P of the virtual entry line L 1 and the virtual exit line L 2 , and the exit point O draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve to obtain the first lane line K 1 . It should be noted that when the positions of the obstacles are different, the positional relationship between the first lane line K 1 and the obstacles may also be different. For example, the obstacle J 1 shown in (A) in FIG. The obstacle J 2 shown in (B) is more to the left, which causes the same first lane line K 1 to intersect with the obstacle J 1 shown in (A) in FIG. The illustrated obstacle J2 does not intersect.
步骤603,制图设备确定路口中的障碍物的类型: Step 603, the mapping device determines the type of obstacles in the intersection:
若路口中的障碍物是不具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则执行步骤604;If the obstacle in the intersection is an obstacle that does not have the function of traffic regulation indication, go to step 604;
若路口中的障碍物是具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则执行步骤606。If the obstacle in the intersection is an obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication, step 606 is executed.
步骤604,制图设备判断第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离是否小于预设的避障距离,若是,则执行步骤605,若否,则执行步骤609。 Step 604 , the mapping device determines whether the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if so, go to step 605 , if not, go to step 609 .
在上述步骤604中,当预设的避障距离为0时,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,是指:第一车道线与障碍物相交,如图7中(A)所示。当预设的避障距离大于0(例如30cm)时,第一车道线与障碍物的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,是指:第一车道线与障碍物相交,如图7中(A)所示;或者,第一车道线与障碍物不相交但最小距离小于30cm,如图7中(B)所示。In the above step 604, when the preset obstacle avoidance distance is 0, the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which means: the first lane line intersects the obstacle, as shown in FIG. 7 shown in (A). When the preset obstacle avoidance distance is greater than 0 (for example, 30cm), the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, which means: the first lane line intersects the obstacle, as shown in Figure 7 ( A); or, the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle but the minimum distance is less than 30cm, as shown in (B) in Figure 7.
步骤605,制图设备在第一车道线的两侧区域中选择一侧区域作为目标避障区域,之后执行步骤607。 Step 605 , the drawing device selects one side of the area on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and then performs step 607 .
在上述步骤605中,制图设备可以通过如下任一方式选择目标避障区域:In the above step 605, the mapping device can select the target obstacle avoidance area in any of the following ways:
方式一,在第一车道线与障碍物相交的情况下,第一车道线会将障碍物划分为两个障碍物区域,制图设备可以从第一车道线的两侧区域中选择出与第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域所在的区域作为目标避障区域。实现过程如下:继续参照图7中(A)所示,假设第一车道线K
1的左侧区域为D
1,右侧区域为D
2,第一车道线K
1与障碍物J
1的两个 交点为点E
1和点E
2,第一车道线K
1将障碍物J
1划分为障碍物区域S和障碍物区域R,则制图设备可以先在障碍物区域S的边缘上找到距离线段E
1E
2(在本文中,线段E
1E
2可以是指位于点E
1和点E
2之间的那部分第一车道线,也可以是指连接点E
1和点E
2得到的直线段,具体不作限定)最远的点M
S,假设点M
S与线段E
1E
2的垂足为点F,则,障碍物区域S与第一车道线K
1的最远距离为线段M
SF的长度。对应的,制图设备可以在障碍物区域R的边缘上找到距离线段E
1E
2最远的点M
R,假设点M
R与线段E
1E
2的垂足为点G,则,障碍物区域R与第一车道线K
1的最远距离为线段M
RG的长度。由于线段M
SF的长度小于线段M
RG的长度,因此,障碍物区域S为这两个障碍物区域中与第一车道线K
1的最远距离最小的目标障碍物区域,制图设备从第一车道线K
1的两侧区域D
1和D
2中选择目标障碍物区域S所在的一侧区域D
1作为目标避障区域。
Method 1, when the first lane line intersects with the obstacle, the first lane line will divide the obstacle into two obstacle areas, and the drawing device can select the area on both sides of the first lane line that is the same as the first lane line. The area where the obstacle area with the longest distance and the smallest distance of the lane line is located is used as the target obstacle avoidance area. The implementation process is as follows: continue to refer to (A) in FIG. 7 , assuming that the left area of the first lane line K 1 is D 1 , the right area is D 2 , and the two areas between the first lane line K 1 and the obstacle J 1 are assumed to be D 1 . The intersection points are point E 1 and point E 2 , the first lane line K 1 divides obstacle J 1 into obstacle area S and obstacle area R, then the mapping device can first find the distance line segment on the edge of obstacle area S E 1 E 2 (In this paper, the line segment E 1 E 2 may refer to the part of the first lane line between the point E 1 and the point E 2 , or it may refer to the straight line obtained by connecting the point E 1 and the point E 2 segment, not specifically limited) the farthest point MS, assuming that the point MS and the vertical foot of the line segment E 1 E 2 are point F, then the farthest distance between the obstacle area S and the first lane line K 1 is the line segment M Length of SF. Correspondingly, the drawing device can find the point MR farthest from the line segment E 1 E 2 on the edge of the obstacle area R , assuming that the point MR and the line segment E 1 E 2 are perpendicular to the point G, then, the obstacle area The farthest distance between R and the first lane line K 1 is the length of the line segment MR G. Since the length of the line segment M SF is less than the length of the line segment M R G, the obstacle area S is the target obstacle area with the smallest distance from the first lane line K 1 among the two obstacle areas. From the areas D 1 and D 2 on both sides of the first lane line K 1 , the side area D 1 where the target obstacle area S is located is selected as the target obstacle avoidance area.
在上述方式一中,通过将距离第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域所在的一侧区域作为目标避障区域,能依赖于第一车道线与障碍物的位置关系,通过一个较小的变形获得第二车道线,有助于降低重新拟合第二车道线的难度。且,由于第二车道线在距离障碍物边缘的最远距离最近的区域内进行绘制,因此还有可能让第二车道线具有较短的长度,有助于指示车辆通过较短的行驶距离尽快绕开障碍物,提高车辆的避障效率。In the above-mentioned way 1, by using the side area where the obstacle area with the longest distance and the smallest distance from the first lane line is located as the target obstacle avoidance area, it can rely on the positional relationship between the first lane line and the obstacle, through a relatively A small deformation obtains the second lane line, which helps to reduce the difficulty of refitting the second lane line. Also, since the second lane line is drawn in the area closest to the furthest distance from the edge of the obstacle, it is also possible to have the second lane line with a shorter length, helping to direct the vehicle to travel the shorter distance as quickly as possible. Avoid obstacles and improve the vehicle's obstacle avoidance efficiency.
方式二,在第一车道线与障碍物不相交但最小距离小于预设的避障距离的情况下,制图设备可以将第一车道线的两侧区域中不包含障碍物的区域作为目标避障区域,例如图7中(B)所示意的区域D
1。
Method 2: In the case where the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle but the minimum distance is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, the mapping device can use the area on both sides of the first lane line that does not contain obstacles as the target obstacle avoidance area, such as the area D 1 shown in (B) of FIG. 7 .
需要说明的是,上述内容只是示例性地介绍两种可选地实施方式。在其它可选地实施方式中,制图设备也可以在第一车道线的两侧区域中随机选择一侧区域作为目标避障区域,或者也可以将第一车道线的两侧区域中包含的障碍物区域的面积最小的一侧区域作为目标避障区域,或者还可以根据具体的交通场景采用不同的策略。例如,考虑到直行车辆在障碍物的左侧避让时,很可能会与对侧直行车辆碰撞,因此制图设备也可以将第二车道线的右侧区域作为目标避障区域,以便在地图中标注出绕障碍物右侧避让的第二车道线,降低直行车辆与对侧直行车辆碰撞的概率。It should be noted that the above contents are merely exemplary to introduce two optional implementation manners. In other optional implementation manners, the mapping device may also randomly select one side of the area on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, or may also use the obstacles included in the areas on both sides of the first lane line The area on the side with the smallest area of the object area is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, or different strategies can be adopted according to specific traffic scenarios. For example, considering that when a straight vehicle avoids an obstacle on the left side, it is likely to collide with a straight vehicle on the opposite side, so the mapping device can also take the area on the right side of the second lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area for marking on the map Exit the second lane line that avoids on the right side of the obstacle to reduce the probability of collision between the straight-going vehicle and the opposite-side straight-going vehicle.
步骤606,制图设备判断第一车道线是否位于具有交规指示功能的障碍物所指示的目标避障区域内且与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离,若否,则执行步骤607,若是,则执行步骤609。 Step 606, the mapping device determines whether the first lane line is located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the traffic regulation indication function and the minimum distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, if not, then go to step 607 , if yes, go to step 609 .
示例性地,继续参照图7中(A)所示,假设障碍物J
1为交通圈,则:当前对应为左转车道,而交通圈指示待左转的车辆在交通圈的左侧左转,即,交通圈指示的目标避障区域为障碍物J
1的左侧区域,第一车道线K
1并未位于障碍物J
1的左侧区域而是与障碍物J
1相交,因此第一车道线K
1并未位于目标避障区域内;且,第一车道线K
1与障碍物J
1相交,因此第一车道线K
1与障碍物J
1的最小距离小于预设的避障距离,制图设备需要重新确定第二车道线。继续参照图7中(B)所示,假设障碍物J
2为环岛,则:当前对应为左转车道,环岛指示车辆均沿环岛逆时针方向单向移动至出口位置,因此环岛所指示的目标避障区域为障碍物J
2的右侧区域,而第一车道线K
1位于障碍物J
2的左侧区域,因此第一车道线K
1并未位于目标避障区域内,因此,即使第一车道线K
1与障碍物J
2不相交,制图设备也要重新确定第二车道线。
Exemplarily, continuing to refer to (A) in FIG. 7 , assuming that the obstacle J 1 is a traffic circle, then: the current corresponds to a left-turn lane, and the traffic circle indicates that the vehicle to be turned left turns left on the left side of the traffic circle. , that is, the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the traffic circle is the area on the left side of the obstacle J1, and the first lane line K1 is not located in the area on the left side of the obstacle J1 but intersects the obstacle J1, so the first lane line K1 The lane line K 1 is not located in the target obstacle avoidance area; and, the first lane line K 1 intersects with the obstacle J 1 , so the minimum distance between the first lane line K 1 and the obstacle J 1 is smaller than the preset obstacle avoidance distance , the mapping equipment needs to re-determine the second lane line. Continue to refer to as shown in (B) in FIG. 7 , assuming that the obstacle J 2 is a roundabout, then: the current corresponding to the left-turn lane, the roundabout indicates that the vehicles all move counterclockwise to the exit position along the roundabout, so the target indicated by the roundabout is The obstacle avoidance area is the area on the right side of the obstacle J 2 , and the first lane line K 1 is located on the left area of the obstacle J 2 , so the first lane line K 1 is not located in the target obstacle avoidance area. The first lane line K 1 does not intersect with the obstacle J 2 , and the mapping device also needs to re-determine the second lane line.
步骤607,制图设备从目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,拟合得到第二车道线。 Step 607, the mapping device selects at least one control point from the target obstacle avoidance area whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and obtains the first control point by fitting according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point. Two-lane line.
在上述步骤607中,至少一个控制点可以是:包括一个控制点,制图设备根据驶入点、该一个控制点和驶出点绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,得到第二车道线;或者,包括至少两个控制点,制图设备根据驶入点、至少两个控制点和驶出点绘制高阶贝塞尔曲线或高阶样条曲线,得到第二车道线。In the above step 607, the at least one control point may include one control point, and the drawing device draws a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the entry point, the one control point and the exit point, to obtain a second order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve. Lane line; or, including at least two control points, the drawing device draws a higher-order Bezier curve or a higher-order spline curve according to the entry point, the at least two control points and the exit point to obtain the second lane line.
在一种可选地实施方式中,继续参照图7中(A)所示,当第一车道线K
1的左侧区域D
1为目标避障区域时,制图设备可以先从位于目标避障区域D
1内的障碍物区域S上找到距离第一车道线K
1最远的点M
S(即第一位置点),并找到点M
S到第一车道线K
1的垂足F,自点M
S开始反方向延长线段M
SF至点N(即第二位置点),且使线段M
SN的长度刚好等于预设的避障距离。通过上述步骤,制图设备以障碍物区域S上距离第一车道线K
1最远的点M
S为基准,找到了与障碍物J
1的距离刚好等于预设的避障距离的点N。之后,制图设备可以基于驶入点I、点N和驶出点O,按照如下任一方式拟合得到第二车道线:
In an optional implementation manner, continuing to refer to (A) in FIG. 7 , when the left area D1 of the first lane line K1 is the target obstacle avoidance area, the mapping device may first locate the target obstacle avoidance area. Find the point MS (ie, the first position point) that is farthest from the first lane line K 1 on the obstacle area S in the area D 1 , and find the foot F from the point MS to the first lane line K 1 . The point MS starts to extend the line segment MS F in the opposite direction to the point N (ie, the second position point), and the length of the line segment MS N is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance. Through the above steps, the mapping device uses the point MS on the obstacle area S farthest from the first lane line K1 as a reference, and finds a point N whose distance from the obstacle J1 is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance. After that, the drawing device can obtain the second lane line by fitting according to any of the following methods based on the entry point I, the point N and the exit point O:
方式一,制图设备可以直接将点N作为一个控制点,根据驶入点I、控制点N和驶出点O绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,得到第二车道线。In the first way, the drawing device can directly use the point N as a control point, and draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the entry point I, the control point N, and the exit point O to obtain the second lane line.
方式二,继续参照图7中(A)所示,制图设备可以自点N开始向两侧方向作垂直于线段FN的直线L
3(即控制线),该直线L
3与虚拟驶入线L
1的交点为C
1(一个第五位置点),与虚拟驶出线L
2的交点为C
2(另一个第五位置点)。制图设备可以将点C
1、点N和点C
2作为三个控制点,根据驶入点I、控制点C
1、控制点N、控制点C
2和驶出点O拟合得到第二车道线。例如可以直接根据驶入点I、控制点C
1、控制点N、控制点C
2和驶出点O绘制四阶贝塞尔曲线或四阶样条曲线以得到第二车道线,也可以根据驶入点I、控制点C
1和控制点N绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,作为第二车道线的第一段,根据控制点N、控制点C
2和驶出点O绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,作为第二车道线的第二段。
Mode 2, continuing to refer to (A) in FIG. 7 , the drawing device can draw a straight line L 3 (ie, a control line) perpendicular to the line segment FN from the point N to both sides. The straight line L 3 and the virtual approach line L The intersection point of 1 is C 1 (a fifth position point), and the intersection point with the virtual exit line L 2 is C 2 (another fifth position point). The drawing device can use point C 1 , point N and point C 2 as three control points, and obtain the second lane by fitting according to the entry point I, the control point C 1 , the control point N, the control point C 2 and the exit point O Wire. For example, a fourth-order Bezier curve or a fourth-order spline curve can be drawn directly according to the entry point I, the control point C 1 , the control point N, the control point C 2 and the exit point O to obtain the second lane line. Draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve at entry point I, control point C 1 and control point N, as the first segment of the second lane line, according to control point N, control point C 2 and exit point O draws a second-order Bezier curve or second-order spline as the second segment of the second lane line.
方式三,在按照方式二中的方法作出垂直于线段NF的直线L
3之后,制图设备还可以从直线L
3上选择分别位于点N两侧的两个点V
1和点V
2(两个第五位置点),将点V
1、点N和点V
2作为三个控制点,根据驶入点I、控制点V
1、控制点N和控制点V
2和驶出点O绘制四阶贝塞尔曲线或四阶样条曲线以得到第二车道线,或者根据驶入点I、控制点V
1和控制点N绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,作为第二车道线的第一段,根据控制点N、控制点V
2和驶出点O绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,作为第二车道线的第二段。其中,控制点V
1和控制点V
2可以从点N的两侧均匀选取,即保证线段V
1N的长度等于线段V
2N的长度,以便使制图设备能基于分布比较均匀的三个控制点绘制出较为平滑的第二车道线。示例性地,均匀选取的方式可以包括但不限于:从控制点N左侧的直线段L
3上选择与控制点N的距离恰好等于线段E
1E
2长度的点作为控制点V
1,从控制点N右侧的直线段L
3上选择与控制点N的距离恰好等于线段E
1E
2长度的点作为控制点V
2;选择线段NC
1的中点作为控制点V
1,选择线段NC
2的中点作为控制点V
2。当然还可以采用其它选取方式,此处不再一一列举。
In the third mode, after the straight line L 3 perpendicular to the line segment NF is made according to the method in the second mode, the drawing device can also select from the straight line L 3 two points V 1 and V 2 (two points V 1 and V 2 (two Fifth position point), take point V 1 , point N and point V 2 as three control points, draw fourth order according to entry point I, control point V 1 , control point N and control point V 2 and exit point O Bezier curve or fourth-order spline curve to get the second lane line, or draw second-order Bezier curve or second-order spline curve according to the entry point I, control point V 1 and control point N, as the second lane For the first segment of the line, draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the control point N, the control point V2 and the exit point O, as the second segment of the second lane line. Among them, the control point V 1 and the control point V 2 can be uniformly selected from both sides of the point N, that is, the length of the line segment V 1 N is guaranteed to be equal to the length of the line segment V 2 N, so that the drawing equipment can be based on the three control points with relatively uniform distribution. point to draw a smoother second lane line. Exemplarily, the method of uniform selection may include, but is not limited to: selecting a point on the straight line segment L3 on the left side of the control point N whose distance from the control point N is exactly equal to the length of the line segment E 1 E 2 as the control point V 1 ; On the straight line segment L3 on the right side of the control point N, select a point whose distance from the control point N is exactly equal to the length of the line segment E 1 E 2 as the control point V 2 ; select the midpoint of the line segment NC 1 as the control point V 1 , and select the line segment NC The midpoint of 2 serves as the control point V 2 . Of course, other selection methods may also be adopted, which will not be listed one by one here.
方式四,在按照方式三中的方法选取出位于点N两侧的控制点V
1和控制点V
2之后,如果不考虑第二车道线的平滑性,还可以根据驶入点I、控制点C
1和控制点V
1绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,作为第二车道线的第一段,将控制点V
1、控制点N和控制点V
2的线段作为第二车道线的第二段,根据控制点V
2、控制点C
2和驶出点O绘制二阶贝塞尔曲线或二阶样条曲线,作为第二车道线的第三段。该方式能获得曲线段与直线段相结合的第二车道线。
Mode 4: After selecting the control point V 1 and the control point V 2 on both sides of the point N according to the method in Mode 3, if the smoothness of the second lane line is not considered, it can also be determined according to the entry point I, the control point Draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve between C 1 and control point V 1 as the first segment of the second lane line, and take the line segment of control point V 1 , control point N and control point V 2 as the second segment For the second segment of the lane line, draw a second-order Bezier curve or a second-order spline curve according to the control point V 2 , the control point C 2 and the exit point O, as the third segment of the second lane line. In this way, the second lane line in which the curve segment and the straight segment are combined can be obtained.
在另一种可选地实施方式中,继续参照图7中(B)所示,当第一车道线K
1的左侧区域D
1为目标避障区域时,制图设备可以先从障碍物J
2上找到距离第一车道线K
1最近的点M
U(即第三位置点),并找到点M
U到第一车道线K
1的垂足X,自点M
U开始反方向延长线段M
UX至点N(即第四位置点),且使线段M
UN的长度刚好等于预设的避障距离。通过上述步骤,制图设备以障碍物J
2上距离第一车道线K
1最近的点M
U为基准,找到了与障碍物J
2的距离刚好等于预设的避障距离的点N,之后,制图设备可以基于驶入点I、点N和驶出点O,按照如上任一方式拟合得到第二车道线。
In another optional implementation, continue referring to (B) shown in FIG. 7 , when the left area D 1 of the first lane line K 1 is the target obstacle avoidance area, the drawing device can first start from the obstacle J 2 , find the point M U (ie, the third position point) that is closest to the first lane line K 1 , and find the foot X from the point M U to the first lane line K 1 , and extend the line segment M in the opposite direction from the point M U U X to point N (ie, the fourth position point), and the length of the line segment M U N is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance. Through the above steps, the drawing device uses the point MU closest to the first lane line K 1 on the obstacle J 2 as the benchmark, and finds the point N whose distance from the obstacle J 2 is exactly equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then, The mapping device may obtain the second lane line by fitting according to any of the above methods based on the entry point I, the point N, and the exit point O.
需要说明的是,上述只是示例性介绍几种可能的拟合方式,本申请并不限定只能使用这几种拟合方式。例如,在另一种可能的拟合方式中,继续参照图7中(A)所示,制图设备也可以从线段FM
S的延长线上选择与点M
S的距离大于预设的避障距离的点(如图7中的T),作为上述四种情况中的控制点N,按照上述四种情况中的其中一种绘制第二车道线。或者,在又一种可能的拟合方式中,制图设备还可以直接从驶入点I、控制点M
S和驶出点O构成的区域内随机选择与障碍物的距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的一个或多个控制点绘制第二车道线。可能的拟合方式有很多,此处不再一一列举。
It should be noted that the above is just an example to introduce several possible fitting methods, and the present application does not limit the use of only these several fitting methods. For example, in another possible fitting method, continuing to refer to (A) in FIG. 7 , the drawing device may also select a distance from the extension line of the line segment FM S to the point MS that is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance The point (T in FIG. 7 ) is used as the control point N in the above four situations, and the second lane line is drawn according to one of the above four situations. Or, in another possible fitting manner, the mapping device can also directly select the distance from the obstacle greater than or equal to the preset distance from the area formed by the entry point I, the control point MS and the exit point O at random. One or more control points of the obstacle avoidance distance draw a second lane line. There are many possible fitting methods, which will not be listed here.
步骤608,制图设备在地图上标注第二车道线。 Step 608, the mapping device marks the second lane line on the map.
示例性地,继续参照图7中(A)所示,当前确定出的第二车道线对应为左转车道的右侧车道边线,制图设备还可以根据预设的车道宽度以及第二车道线所对应的至少一个控制点,确定左侧车道边线所对应的至少一个控制点,利用左侧车道边线对应的驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点绘制左侧车道边线。其中,预设的车道宽度可以是指驶入车道的车道宽度或驶出车道的车道宽度,也可以是从驶入车道的车道宽度逐渐过渡到驶出车道的车道宽的一个渐变量,以便标注后的车道线能适用于车辆驶出后的车道。Exemplarily, continuing to refer to (A) in FIG. 7 , the currently determined second lane line corresponds to the right lane edge of the left-turn lane. For at least one corresponding control point, at least one control point corresponding to the left lane edge is determined, and the left lane edge is drawn by using the entry point, at least one control point and exit point corresponding to the left lane edge. The preset lane width may refer to the width of the lane entering the lane or the width of the lane leaving the lane, or it may be a gradual transition from the width of the lane entering the lane to the width of the lane leaving the lane, so as to mark The rear lane line can be applied to the lane after the vehicle exits.
步骤609,制图设备在地图上标注第一车道线。 Step 609, the mapping device marks the first lane line on the map.
在上述实施例三中,在第一车道线不满足标注要求的情况下,通过在第一车道线的一侧区域内选择与障碍物的距离大于或等于预设的避障距离的控制点,作为拟合第二车道线的基准,能提高拟合出满足避障距离要求的第二车道线的概率,提高标注车道线的成功率。且,通过对不同类型的障碍物选择不同的目标避障区域,还能尽量让第二车道线位于障碍物所对应的区域内,有效提高标注车道线的准确性。In the third embodiment above, in the case that the first lane line does not meet the labeling requirements, by selecting a control point whose distance from the obstacle is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance in a side area of the first lane line, As a benchmark for fitting the second lane line, the probability of fitting the second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance distance requirement can be improved, and the success rate of marking the lane line can be improved. Moreover, by selecting different target obstacle avoidance areas for different types of obstacles, the second lane line can be located in the area corresponding to the obstacle as much as possible, effectively improving the accuracy of marking the lane line.
下面分别基于不同的路口情况,示例性地介绍上述车道线标注方法的一些应用。下文中假设路口中的障碍物均为普通障碍物。Some applications of the above lane line marking method are exemplarily introduced below based on different intersection situations. In the following, it is assumed that the obstacles in the intersection are ordinary obstacles.
路口情况一road situation one
图8示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种在路口中标注转弯车道线的流程示意图,如图8所示,该示例中的空白区域表示路口,条状区域表示人行横道,路口右下方存在一个矩形的障碍物:FIG. 8 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8 , the blank area in this example represents the intersection, the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing, and there is a crosswalk at the lower right of the intersection. A rectangular obstacle:
一种情况下,该示例可以看做是标注左转车道线,即车辆从图示左侧驶入路口,从图示上方驶出路口。在实施中,制图设备可以先根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
11和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
21绘制出如图8中(A)所示意的左转车道的右侧车道边线L
11,并根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
12和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
22绘制出如图8中(A)所示意的左转车道的左侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,右侧车道边线L
11与障碍物相交而左侧车道边线L
12与障碍物不相交,右侧车道边线L
11为该种情况下的临界边线,因此制 图设备可以将右侧车道边线L
11作为第一车道线。进一步地,根据障碍物被第一车道线L
11分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
11左侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线右侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
11的左侧区域为目标避障区域,从第一车道线L
11的左侧区域中选择与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离(如30cm)的至少一个控制点(图8中未进行示意),根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
11、该至少一个控制点和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
21绘制出如图8中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
21,该第二车道线L
21对应为左转车道的右侧车道边线。之后,利用该右侧车道边线L
21对应的至少一个控制点、以及驶入车道的宽度或驶出车道的宽度,确定出左转车道的左侧车道边线对应的至少一个控制点,利用图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
12、左侧车道边线对应的至少一个控制点和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
22,绘制出如图8中(B)所示意的左侧车道边线L
22。该示例中的右侧车道边线L
21和左侧车道边线L
22能指示左转车辆在障碍物的左侧躲避障碍物。
In one case, this example can be seen as marking the left-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the illustration and exits the intersection from the top of the illustration. In implementation, the drawing device may first draw a left-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 8 according to the entry point B 11 of the entry lane on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 21 of the exit lane above the illustration and draw a left turn as shown in (A) in FIG . The left lane edge L 12 of the lane is compared, and it is found that the right lane edge L 11 intersects the obstacle while the left lane edge L 12 does not intersect the obstacle. The right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge in this case, Therefore, the drawing device can take the right lane edge L11 as the first lane line. Further, according to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L11 , the area of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L11 is larger than that of the obstacle located on the right side of the first lane line. The area of the area is small, so the mapping device determines the left area of the first lane line L11 as the target obstacle avoidance area, and selects the minimum distance from the obstacle from the left area of the first lane line L11 not less than the preset avoidance area. At least one control point (not shown in FIG. 8 ) of the obstacle distance (such as 30cm), according to the entry point B 11 of the left entering lane, the at least one control point and the exit of the exit lane above the illustration Point B 21 draws a second lane line L 21 as shown in FIG. 8(B) , and the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the right lane edge of the left-turn lane. Then, use the at least one control point corresponding to the right lane edge L21 and the width of the entering lane or the exiting lane to determine at least one control point corresponding to the left lane edge of the left turn lane, using the diagram shown in the figure The entry point B 12 of the left entering lane, at least one control point corresponding to the edge of the left lane, and the exit point B 22 of the exit lane above the figure, draw the left side as shown in (B) in Figure 8 Lane edge L 22 . The right lane edge L 21 and the left lane edge L 22 in this example can instruct the left-turn vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the left side of the obstacle.
另一种情况下,该示例也可以看做是标注右转车道线,即车辆从图示上方驶入路口,从图示左侧驶出路口。在实施中,制图设备可以先根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
21和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
11绘制出如图8中(A)所示意的右转车道的左侧车道边线L
11,并根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
22和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
12绘制出如图8中(A)所示意的右转车道的右侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,左侧车道边线L
11与障碍物相交而右侧车道边线L
12与障碍物不相交,因此可以将左侧车道边线L
11作为第一车道线。根据障碍物被第一车道线L
11分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
11右侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线L
11左侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
11的右侧区域为目标避障区域,从第一车道线L
11的右侧区域中选择与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
21、该至少一个控制点和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
11绘制出如图8中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
21,该第二车道线L
21对应为右转车道的左侧车道边线。之后,利用该左侧车道边线L
21对应的至少一个控制点、以及驶入车道的宽度或驶出车道的宽度,确定出右转车道的右侧车道边线对应的至少一个控制点,根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
22、右侧车道边线对应的至少一个控制点和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
12,绘制出如图8中(B)所示意的右侧车道边线L
22。该示例中的左侧车道边线L
21和右侧车道边线L
22能指示右转车辆在障碍物的右侧躲避障碍物。
In another case, this example can also be regarded as marking the right-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the top of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure. In implementation, the drawing device may first draw a right-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 8 according to the entry point B 21 of the entry lane at the top of the illustration and the exit point B 11 of the exit lane at the left side of the illustration. and draw a right turn as shown in (A) in FIG . The right lane edge L 12 of the lane is compared and found that the left lane edge L 11 intersects the obstacle while the right lane edge L 12 does not intersect the obstacle, so the left lane edge L 11 can be used as the first lane line. According to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L11 , the area of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L11 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L11. Therefore, the mapping device determines the area on the right side of the first lane line L11 as the target obstacle avoidance area, and selects the minimum distance to the obstacle from the area on the right side of the first lane line L11 not less than the preset obstacle avoidance area. At least one control point of the distance, which is drawn according to the entry point B 21 of the entry lane at the top of the illustration, the at least one control point and the exit point B 11 of the exit lane on the left side of the illustration, as shown in (B) of FIG. 8 . The second lane line L 21 is illustrated, the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the left lane edge of the right-turn lane. Then, use at least one control point corresponding to the left lane edge L21 and the width of the entering lane or the width of the exiting lane to determine at least one control point corresponding to the right lane edge of the right-turn lane. The entry point B 22 entering the lane above, at least one control point corresponding to the edge of the right lane, and the exit point B 12 exiting the lane on the left side of the figure are drawn to draw the right side as shown in (B) in FIG. 8 Lane edge L 22 . The left lane edge L 21 and the right lane edge L 22 in this example can instruct the right-turning vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the right side of the obstacle.
路口情况二junction two
图9示例性示出本申请实施例提供的另一种在路口中标注转弯车道线的流程示意图,如图9所示,该示例中的空白区域表示路口,条状区域表示人行横道,路口的中央偏上位置处存在一个矩形的障碍物:Fig. 9 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a turning lane line in an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Fig. 9, the blank area in this example represents the intersection, the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing, and the center of the intersection There is a rectangular obstacle at the upper position:
一种情况下,该示例可以看做是标注左转车道线,即车辆从图示左侧驶入路口,从图示上方驶出路口。在实施中,制图设备可以先根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
11和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
21绘制出如图9中(A)所示意的左转车道的右侧车道边线L
11,并根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
12和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
22绘制出如图9中(A)所示意的左转车道的左侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,左侧车道边线L
12与障碍物相交而右侧车道边线L
11与障碍物不相交,左侧车道边线L
12为该种情况下的临界边线,因此制图设备可以将左侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线。进一步地,根据障碍物被第一车道线L
12 分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
12右侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线L
12左侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
12的右侧区域为目标避障区域,根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
12、从第一车道线L
12的右侧区域中选择的控制点和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
22绘制出如图9中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
22,该第二车道线L
22对应为左转车道的左侧车道边线。之后,利用该左侧车道边线L
22对应的控制点和预设的车道宽度,确定出左转车道的右侧车道边线对应的控制点,根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
11、右侧车道边线对应的控制点和图示上方驶出车道的驶出点B
21,绘制出如图9中(B)所示意的右侧车道边线L
21。该示例中的右侧车道边线L
21和左侧车道边线L
22能指示左转车辆在障碍物的右侧躲避障碍物。
In one case, this example can be seen as marking the left-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the illustration and exits the intersection from the top of the illustration. In implementation, the drawing device may first draw a left-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 9 according to the entry point B 11 of the entry lane on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 21 of the exit lane above the illustration and draw a left turn as shown in Fig. 9 (A) according to the entry point B 12 of the left entering lane and the exit point B 22 of the exit lane above the illustration The left lane edge L 12 of the lane is compared, and it is found that the left lane edge L 12 intersects the obstacle while the right lane edge L 11 does not intersect the obstacle. The left lane edge L 12 is the critical edge in this case, Therefore, the drawing device can take the left lane edge L 12 as the first lane line. Further, according to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L12, the area of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12. The area of the obstacle area is small, so the mapping device determines the area on the right side of the first lane line L 12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. The control point selected in the right area and the exit point B 22 of the exit lane above the illustration draw a second lane line L 22 as shown in (B) in FIG. 9 , and the second lane line L 22 corresponds to the left The left lane edge of the turn lane. After that, use the control point corresponding to the left lane edge L22 and the preset lane width to determine the control point corresponding to the right lane edge of the left-turn lane, according to the entry point B11 of the left lane entering the lane. , the control point corresponding to the side line of the right lane and the exit point B 21 of the exit lane above the figure, draw the side line L 21 of the right side lane as shown in FIG. 9(B). The right lane edge L 21 and the left lane edge L 22 in this example can instruct the left-turn vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the right side of the obstacle.
另一种情况下,该示例也可以看做是标注右转车道线,即车辆从图示上方驶入路口,从图示左侧驶出路口。在实施中,制图设备可以先根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
21和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
11绘制出如图9中(A)所示意的右转车道的左侧车道边线L
11,并根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
22和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
12绘制出如图9中(A)所示意的右转车道的右侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,右侧车道边线L
12与障碍物相交而左侧车道边线L
11与障碍物不相交,因此可以将右侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线。根据障碍物被第一车道线L
12分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
12左侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线L
12右侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
12的左侧区域为目标避障区域,根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
22、从第一车道线L
12的左侧区域中选择的控制点和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
12绘制出如图9中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
22,该第二车道线L
22对应为右转车道的右侧车道边线。之后,利用该右侧车道边线L
22对应的至少一个控制点和预设的车道宽度,确定出右转车道的左侧车道边线对应的控制点,根据图示上方驶入车道的驶入点B
21、右侧车道边线对应的控制点和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
11,绘制出如图9中(B)所示意的左侧车道边线L
21。该示例中的左侧车道边线L
21和右侧车道边线L
22能指示右转车辆在障碍物的左侧躲避障碍物。
In another case, this example can also be regarded as marking the right-turn lane line, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the top of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure. In implementation, the drawing device may first draw a right-turn lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 9 according to the entry point B 21 of the entry lane at the top of the illustration and the exit point B 11 of the exit lane at the left side of the illustration. and draw a right turn as shown in (A) in FIG. 9 according to the entry point B 22 of the entry lane at the top of the figure and the exit point B 12 of the left exit lane as shown in the figure The right lane edge L 12 of the lane is compared and found that the right lane edge L 12 intersects the obstacle and the left lane edge L 11 does not intersect the obstacle, so the right lane edge L 12 can be used as the first lane line. According to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L12, the area of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12. The area is small, so the drawing device determines the area on the left side of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. The selected control point and the exit point B 12 of the left exit lane in the figure draw a second lane line L 22 as shown in (B) in FIG. 9 , and the second lane line L 22 corresponds to the right turn lane. Right lane edge. Then, use at least one control point corresponding to the right lane edge L22 and the preset lane width to determine the control point corresponding to the left lane edge of the right-turn lane, and drive into the lane according to the entry point B above the illustration 21. Draw the left lane edge L 21 as shown in FIG. 9(B) from the control point corresponding to the right lane edge and the exit point B 11 of the left exit lane as shown in the figure. The left lane edge L 21 and the right lane edge L 22 in this example can instruct the right-turning vehicle to avoid the obstacle on the left side of the obstacle.
路口情况三Road situation three
图10示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种在路口中标注直行车道线的流程示意图,如图10所示,该示例中的空白区域表示路口,条状区域表示人行横道,路口中存在相邻的两条直行车道,且路口中央处存在一个矩形的障碍物:FIG. 10 exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10 , in this example, the blank area represents the intersection, the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing, and there are phase lines in the intersection. Two adjacent straight lanes, and there is a rectangular obstacle in the center of the intersection:
一种情况下,该示例可以看做是标注两条指示从左向右行驶的直行车道线,即车辆从图示左侧驶入路口,从图示右侧驶出路口。在绘制图示下方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示左侧驶入点B
11和图示右侧驶出点B
21绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
11,根据图示左侧驶入点B
12和图示右侧驶出点B
22绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,虽然右侧车道边线L
11和左侧车道边线L
12均与障碍物相交,但是:如果在障碍物的左侧躲避障碍物,则右侧车道边线L
11为临界边线,右侧车道边线L
11与左侧障碍物的最大距离为D
1,如果在障碍物的右侧躲避障碍物,则左侧车道边线L
12为临界边线,左侧车道边线L
12与右侧障碍物的最大距离为D
2,显然,D
1大于D
2,基于最大距离最小一侧为目标避障区域的原则,制图设备可以将左侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线,将第一车道线L
12的右侧作为目标避障区域,根据图示左侧驶入点B
12、从第一车道线L
12的右侧区域中选择的控制点和图示右侧驶出点 B
22绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
221,该第二车道线L
221对应为下方直行车道的左侧车道边线L
221,进而根据预设的车道宽度绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的下方直行车道的右侧车道边线L
21。在绘制图示上方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示左侧驶入点B
12和图示右侧驶出点B
22绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
12,根据图示左侧驶入点B
13和图示右侧驶出点B
23绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
13,对比发现,右侧车道边线L
12与障碍物相交而左侧车道边线L
13与障碍物不相交,因此制图设备可以将右侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线。根据障碍物被第一车道线L
12分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
12左侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线L
12右侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
12的左侧区域为目标避障区域,根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
12、从第一车道线L
12的左侧区域中选择的控制点和图示右侧驶出车道的驶出点B
22绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的第二车道线,该第二车道线L
222对应为上方直行车道的右侧车道边线,进而根据预设的车道宽度绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的上方直行车道的左侧车道边线L
23。
In one case, this example can be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating left-to-right travel, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the figure and exits the intersection from the right side of the figure. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane below the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 10 according to the entry point B11 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B21 on the right side of the illustration. The right lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 12 and the right exit point B 22 as shown in FIG. 10 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in FIG. , the comparison shows that although the right lane edge L 11 and the left lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge. The maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the left obstacle is D 1 . If the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 12 is the critical edge, and the distance between the left lane edge L 12 and the right obstacle is The maximum distance is D 2 . Obviously, D 1 is greater than D 2 . Based on the principle that the minimum side of the maximum distance is the target obstacle avoidance area, the drawing equipment can take the left lane edge L 12 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L The right side of 12 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area. According to the entry point B 12 on the left side of the drawing, the control point selected from the right area of the first lane line L 12 and the exit point B 22 on the right side of the drawing as shown in the figure: The second lane line L 221 shown in (B) of FIG. 10 corresponds to the left side lane line L 221 of the straight lane below , and is drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 10 ( B) Illustrated right lane edge L 21 of the lower straight lane. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane above the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 according to the entry point B 12 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 22 on the right side of the illustration The right lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 13 and the right exit point B 23 as shown in FIG. 10 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in FIG. , it is found by comparison that the right lane edge L12 intersects the obstacle and the left lane edge L13 does not intersect the obstacle, so the mapping device can take the right lane edge L12 as the first lane line. According to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L12, the area of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12. The area is small, so the mapping device determines the left area of the first lane line L 12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. The control point selected in and the exit point B 22 of the exit lane on the right side of the illustration draws a second lane line as shown in (B) in FIG. 10 , and the second lane line L 222 corresponds to the right side of the upper straight lane. The left lane edge L 23 of the upper straight lane as shown in (B) in FIG. 10 is drawn according to the preset lane width.
另一种情况下,该示例也可以看做是标注两条指示从右向左驶的直行车道线,即车辆从图示右侧驶入路口,从图示左侧驶出路口。在绘制图示下方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示右侧驶入点B
21和图示左侧驶出点B
11绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
11,根据图示右侧驶入点B
22和图示左侧驶出点B
12绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,虽然左侧车道边线L
11和右侧车道边线L
12均与障碍物相交,但是:如果在障碍物的右侧躲避障碍物,则左侧车道边线L
11为临界边线,左侧车道边线L
11与右侧障碍物的最大距离为D
1,如果在障碍物的左侧躲避障碍物,则右侧车道边线L
12为临界边线,右侧车道边线L
12与左侧障碍物的最大距离为D
2,显然,D
1大于D
2,基于最大距离最小一侧为目标避障区域的原则,制图设备可以将右侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线,将第一车道线L
12的左侧作为目标避障区域,根据图示右侧驶入点B
22、从第一车道线L
12的左侧区域中选择的控制点和图示左侧驶出点B
12绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
221,该第二车道线L
221对应为下方直行车道的右侧车道边线L
221,进而根据预设的车道宽度绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的下方直行车道的左侧车道边线L
21。在绘制图示上方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示右侧驶入点B
22和图示左侧驶出点B
12绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
12,根据图示右侧驶入点B
23和图示左侧驶出点B
13绘制出如图10中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
13,对比发现,左侧车道边线L
12与障碍物相交而右侧车道边线L
13与障碍物不相交,因此制图设备可以将左侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线。根据障碍物被第一车道线L
12分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
12右侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线L
12左侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
12的右侧区域为目标避障区域,根据图示右侧驶入车道的驶入点B
22、从第一车道线L
12的右侧区域中选择的控制点和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
12绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的第二车道线,该第二车道线L
222对应为上方直行车道的左侧车道边线,进而根据预设的车道宽度绘制出如图10中(B)所示意的上方直行车道的右侧车道边线L
23。
In another case, this example can also be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating driving from right to left, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the right side of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane below the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 according to the entry point B21 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B11 on the left side of the illustration. The left lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 22 and the illustrated left exit point B 12 to draw the right lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 . , the comparison shows that although the left lane edge L 11 and the right lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge. The maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the obstacle on the right is D 1 . If the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the lane edge L 12 on the right is a critical edge, and the distance between the edge L 12 on the right lane and the obstacle on the left is The maximum distance is D 2 . Obviously, D 1 is greater than D 2 . Based on the principle that the minimum side of the maximum distance is the target obstacle avoidance area, the drawing equipment can take the right lane edge L 12 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L The left side of 12 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area. According to the entry point B 22 on the right side in the drawing, the control point selected from the left area of the first lane line L 12 and the exit point B 12 on the left side in the drawing, the drawing is as follows: The second lane line L 221 shown in (B) in FIG. 10 corresponds to the right lane edge L 221 of the straight lane below , which is then drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 10 ( B) Illustrated left lane edge L21 of the lower straight lane. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane above the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 10 according to the entry point B 22 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B 12 on the left side of the illustration The left lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 23 and the illustrated left exit point B 13 to draw the right lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 10 . , it is found by comparison that the left lane edge L12 intersects the obstacle and the right lane edge L13 does not intersect the obstacle, so the drawing device can take the left lane edge L12 as the first lane line. According to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L12, the area of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12. The area is small, so the mapping device determines the area on the right side of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. The control point selected in and the exit point B 12 of the left exit lane in the figure draws a second lane line as shown in (B) in FIG. 10 , and the second lane line L 222 corresponds to the left side of the upper straight lane. The side lane edge line, and then the right lane edge line L 23 of the upper straight lane as shown in FIG. 10 (B) is drawn according to the preset lane width.
上述示例能让两个相邻直行车道中的车辆分别在障碍物的两侧躲避障碍物。The above example enables vehicles in two adjacent straight lanes to avoid obstacles on either side of the obstacle.
路口情况四Road situation four
图11示例性示出本申请实施例提供的另一种在路口中标注直行车道线的流程示意图,如图11所示,该示例中的空白区域表示路口,条状区域表示人行横道,路口中存在相邻的两条直行车道,且路口中央偏下的位置处存在一个矩形的障碍物:FIG. 11 exemplarily shows another schematic flowchart of marking a straight lane line at an intersection provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11 , the blank area in this example represents the intersection, the strip area represents the pedestrian crossing, and there is an intersection in the intersection. Two adjacent straight lanes, and there is a rectangular obstacle at the lower center of the intersection:
一种情况下,该示例可以看做是标注两条指示从左向右行驶的直行车道线,即车辆从图示左侧驶入路口,从图示右侧驶出路口。在绘制图示下方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示左侧驶入点B
11和图示右侧驶出点B
21绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
11,根据图示左侧驶入点B
12和图示右侧驶出点B
22绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,虽然右侧车道边线L
11和左侧车道边线L
12均与障碍物相交,但是:如果在障碍物的左侧躲避障碍物,则右侧车道边线L
11为临界边线,右侧车道边线L
11与左侧障碍物的最大距离为D
3,如果在障碍物的右侧躲避障碍物,则左侧车道边线L
12为临界边线,左侧车道边线L
12与右侧障碍物的最大距离为D
4,显然,D
3小于D
4,基于最大距离最小一侧为目标避障区域的原则,制图设备可以将右侧车道边线L
11作为第一车道线,将第一车道线L
11的左侧区域作为目标避障区域,根据图示左侧驶入点B
11、从第一车道线L
11的左侧区域中选择的控制点和图示右侧驶出点B
21绘制出如图11中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
21,该第二车道线L
21对应为下方直行车道的右侧车道边线,进而根据预设的车道宽度绘制出如图11中(B)所示意的下方直行车道的左侧车道边线L
22。在绘制图示上方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示左侧驶入点B
12和图示右侧驶出点B
22绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
12,根据图示左侧驶入点B
13和图示右侧驶出点B
23绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
13,对比发现,右侧车道边线L
12与障碍物相交而左侧车道边线L
13与障碍物不相交,因此制图设备可以将右侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线。根据障碍物被第一车道线L
12分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
12左侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线L
12右侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
12的左侧区域为目标避障区域。由于与上方直行车道线相邻的下方直行车道线也位于障碍物的左侧,因此上方直行车道线的右侧车道边线可以直接参照已经绘制好的下方直行车道的左侧车道边线L
22。在此基础上,制图设备可以直接根据绘制左侧车道边线L
22时用到的控制点和预设的车道宽度,确定上方直行车道的左侧车道边线所对应的控制点,根据图示左侧驶入车道的驶入点B
13、确定出的控制点和图示右侧驶出车道的驶出点B
23绘制出如图11中(B)所示意的上方直行车道的左侧车道边线L
23。
In one case, this example can be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating left-to-right travel, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the left side of the figure and exits the intersection from the right side of the figure. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane below the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 11 according to the entry point B11 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B21 on the right side of the illustration. The right lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 12 and the right exit point B 22 as shown in FIG. 11 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in FIG. , the comparison shows that although the right lane edge L 11 and the left lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the right lane edge L 11 is the critical edge. The maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the left obstacle is D 3 . If the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 12 is the critical edge, and the distance between the left lane edge L 12 and the right obstacle is The maximum distance is D 4 . Obviously, D 3 is smaller than D 4 . Based on the principle that the minimum side of the maximum distance is the target obstacle avoidance area, the drawing equipment can take the right lane edge L 11 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L The left area of 11 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, which is drawn according to the left entry point B 11 in the figure, the control point selected from the left area of the first lane line L 11 , and the right exit point B 21 in the figure. The second lane line L 21 as shown in FIG. 11(B), the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the right lane edge of the lower straight lane, and is drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 11(B). ), the left lane edge L 22 of the lower straight lane. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane above the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 11 according to the entry point B 12 on the left side of the illustration and the exit point B 22 on the right side of the illustration The right lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the left entry point B 13 and the right exit point B 23 as shown in FIG. 11 (A) to draw the left lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in FIG. , it is found by comparison that the right lane edge L12 intersects the obstacle and the left lane edge L13 does not intersect the obstacle, so the mapping device can take the right lane edge L12 as the first lane line. According to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L12, the area of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12. The area of is small, so the mapping device determines the left area of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. Since the lower through lane line adjacent to the upper through lane line is also on the left side of the obstacle, the right lane edge of the upper through lane line can directly refer to the already drawn left lane edge L 22 of the lower through lane. On this basis, the drawing device can directly determine the control point corresponding to the left lane edge of the upper straight lane according to the control point and the preset lane width used in drawing the left lane edge L 22 , according to the left side of the illustration. The entry point B 13 of the entry lane, the determined control point, and the exit point B 23 of the illustrated right exit lane draw the left lane edge L of the upper straight lane as shown in FIG. 11(B) 23 .
另一种情况下,该示例也可以看做是标注两条指示从右向左驶的直行车道线,即车辆从图示右侧驶入路口,从图示左侧驶出路口。在绘制图示下方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示右侧驶入点B
21和图示左侧驶出点B
11绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
11,根据图示右侧驶入点B
22和图示左侧驶出点B
12绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
12,对比发现,虽然左侧车道边线L
11和右侧车道边线L
12均与障碍物相交,但是:如果在障碍物的右侧躲避障碍物,则左侧车道边线L
11为临界边线,左侧车道边线L
11与右侧障碍物的最大距离为D
3,如果在障碍物的左侧躲避障碍物,则右侧车道边线L
12为临界边线,右侧车道边线L
12与左侧障碍物的最大距离为D
4,显然,D
3小于D
4,基于最大距离最小一侧为目标避障区域的原则,制图设备可以将左侧车道边线L
11作为第一车道线,将第一车道线L
11的右侧区域作为目标避障 区域,根据图示右侧驶入点B
21、从第一车道线L
11的右侧区域中选择的控制点和图示左侧驶出点B
11绘制出如图11中(B)所示意的第二车道线L
21,该第二车道线L
21对应为下方直行车道的左侧车道边线,进而根据预设的车道宽度绘制出如图11中(B)所示意的下方直行车道的右侧车道边线L
22。在绘制图示上方直行车道的直行车道线时,制图设备可以先根据图示右侧驶入点B
22和图示左侧驶出点B
12绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的左侧车道边线L
12,根据图示右侧驶入点B
23和图示左侧驶出点B
13绘制出如图11中(A)所示意的直行车道的右侧车道边线L
13,对比发现,左侧车道边线L
12与障碍物相交而右侧车道边线L
13与障碍物不相交,因此制图设备可以将左侧车道边线L
12作为第一车道线。根据障碍物被第一车道线L
12分成的两个障碍物区域的面积可知,位于第一车道线L
12右侧的障碍物区域的面积比位于第一车道线L
12左侧的障碍物区域的面积小,因此制图设备确定第一车道线L
12的右侧区域为目标避障区域。由于与上方直行车道线相邻的下方直行车道线也位于障碍物的右侧,因此上方直行车道线的左侧车道边线可以直接参照已经绘制好的下方直行车道的右侧车道边线L
22。在此基础上,制图设备可以直接根据绘制右侧车道边线L
22时用到的控制点和预设的车道宽度,确定上方直行车道的右侧车道边线所对应的控制点,根据图示右侧驶入车道的驶入点B
23、确定出的控制点和图示左侧驶出车道的驶出点B
13绘制出如图11中(B)所示意的上方直行车道的右侧车道边线L
23。
In another case, this example can also be seen as marking two straight lane lines indicating driving from right to left, that is, the vehicle enters the intersection from the right side of the figure and exits the intersection from the left side of the figure. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane below the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 11 according to the entry point B21 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B11 on the left side of the illustration. The left lane edge L 11 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 22 and the illustrated left exit point B 12 to draw the right lane edge L 12 of the straight lane as shown in (A) in FIG. 11 , the comparison shows that although the left lane edge L 11 and the right lane edge L 12 both intersect with the obstacle, if the obstacle is avoided on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge, and the left lane edge L 11 is the critical edge. The maximum distance between the lane edge L 11 and the obstacle on the right is D 3 . If the obstacle is avoided on the left side of the obstacle, the lane edge L 12 on the right is a critical edge, and the distance between the edge L 12 on the right lane and the obstacle on the left is The maximum distance is D 4 . Obviously, D 3 is smaller than D 4 . Based on the principle that the minimum side of the maximum distance is the target obstacle avoidance area, the drawing equipment can take the left lane edge L 11 as the first lane line, and the first lane line L The right area of 11 is used as the target obstacle avoidance area, which is drawn according to the right entry point B 21 in the figure, the control point selected from the right area of the first lane line L 11 , and the left exit point B 11 in the figure. The second lane line L 21 as shown in FIG. 11(B), the second lane line L 21 corresponds to the left lane edge of the straight lane below, and is drawn according to the preset lane width as shown in FIG. 11(B ). ), the right lane edge L 22 of the lower straight lane. When drawing the straight lane line of the straight lane above the illustration, the drawing device can first draw the straight lane as shown in (A) in Figure 11 according to the entry point B 22 on the right side of the illustration and the exit point B 12 on the left side of the illustration The left lane edge L 12 of the lane is drawn according to the illustrated right entry point B 23 and the illustrated left exit point B 13 to draw the right lane edge L 13 of the straight lane as shown in (A) of FIG. 11 , it is found by comparison that the left lane edge L12 intersects the obstacle and the right lane edge L13 does not intersect the obstacle, so the drawing device can take the left lane edge L12 as the first lane line. According to the area of the two obstacle areas that the obstacle is divided into by the first lane line L12, the area of the obstacle area located on the right side of the first lane line L12 is larger than that of the obstacle area located on the left side of the first lane line L12. The area of is small, so the mapping device determines the area to the right of the first lane line L12 as the target obstacle avoidance area. Since the lower through lane line adjacent to the upper through lane line is also on the right side of the obstacle, the left lane edge of the upper through lane line can directly refer to the drawn right lane edge L 22 of the lower through lane. On this basis, the drawing equipment can directly determine the control point corresponding to the right lane edge of the upper straight lane according to the control point and the preset lane width used in drawing the right lane edge L 22 . The entry point B 23 of the entry lane, the determined control point, and the exit point B 13 of the left exit lane as shown in FIG. 11 draw the right lane edge L of the upper straight lane as shown in (B) of FIG. 11 23 .
上述示例能让两个相邻直行车道中的车辆在障碍物的同一侧躲避障碍物。The above example enables vehicles in two adjacent through lanes to avoid an obstacle on the same side of the obstacle.
需要说明的是,上述只是示例性介绍几种在路口中标注避障车道线的方式,在实际的交通场景中,还可能会存在更多的路口情况,本申请对此不再一一列举。It should be noted that the above are just examples of several ways of marking obstacle avoidance lane lines at intersections. In actual traffic scenarios, there may be more intersections, which are not listed one by one in this application.
另外,需要说明的是,上述各个实施例都只是以车道或路口中存在一个障碍物为例进行介绍,在真实场景中,车道或路口中也可以存在多个障碍物。在这种情况下,制图设备可以是直接选择与多个障碍物的最小距离都大于或等于预设的避障距离的点作为控制点来绘制第二车道线,也可以是先以某一个障碍物为基准绘制第二车道线后,再判断该第二车道线是否满足其它障碍物的避障要求,在满足时标注第二车道线,在不满足时再重新以该第二车道线为基准绘制新的第二车道线,重复执行上述过程直至找到满足所有障碍物的避障要求的目标第二车道线为止,将目标第二车道线标注在地图上。其中,先选择的障碍物可以是从多个障碍物中随机选择或按照位置顺序依次选择的,也可以是多个障碍物中位置关系最严峻的,具体不作限定。In addition, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only described by taking an obstacle in a lane or an intersection as an example, and in a real scene, there may also be multiple obstacles in a lane or an intersection. In this case, the drawing device may directly select a point whose minimum distance to multiple obstacles is greater than or equal to the preset obstacle avoidance distance as a control point to draw the second lane line, or may first use a certain obstacle After drawing the second lane line based on the object, then judge whether the second lane line meets the obstacle avoidance requirements of other obstacles, mark the second lane line when it meets the requirements, and re-use the second lane line as the benchmark when it does not meet the requirements. Draw a new second lane line, repeat the above process until the target second lane line that meets the obstacle avoidance requirements of all obstacles is found, and mark the target second lane line on the map. Wherein, the obstacle to be selected first may be randomly selected from multiple obstacles or sequentially selected in position order, or may be the one with the most severe positional relationship among the multiple obstacles, which is not specifically limited.
需要说明的是,上述各个信息的名称仅仅是作为示例,随着通信技术的演变,上述任意信息均可能改变其名称,但不管其名称如何发生变化,只要其含义与本申请上述信息的含义相同,则均落入本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that the names of the above information are only examples. With the evolution of communication technology, any of the above information may change its name, but no matter how the name changes, as long as its meaning is the same as the meaning of the above information in this application , all fall within the protection scope of this application.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,上述实现各网元为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本发明能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solution provided by the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, each network element in the above-mentioned implementation includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the present invention can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of the present invention.
根据前述方法,图12示例性示出本申请实施例提供的一种车道线标注装置的结构示意图,如图12所示,该装置可以为制图设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于制图 设备中的芯片或电路,示例性地可以为实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例所述的制图设备。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 12 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a lane marking device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 12 , the device may be a drawing device, or a chip or a circuit, for example, it may be set in The chip or circuit in the drawing device can be, for example, the drawing device described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 3.
如图12所示,该车道线标注装置1201可以包括处理器1202、存储器1204和收发器1203,还可以进一步包括总线系统,其中,处理器1202、存储器1204和收发器1203可以通过总线系统相连。As shown in FIG. 12 , the lane marking apparatus 1201 may include a processor 1202, a memory 1204 and a transceiver 1203, and may further include a bus system, wherein the processor 1202, the memory 1204 and the transceiver 1203 may be connected through the bus system.
应理解,上述处理器1202可以是一个芯片。例如,该处理器1202可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the above-mentioned processor 1202 may be a chip. For example, the processor 1202 may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a system on chip (SoC). It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller). unit, MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器1202中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器1202中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器1204,处理器1202读取存储器1204中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1202 or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor 1202 . The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory 1204, and the processor 1202 reads the information in the memory 1204, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器1202可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor 1202 in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器1204可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory 1204 in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
该车道线标注装置1201对应制图设备的情况下,该车道线标注装置可以包括处理器 1202、收发器1203和存储器1204。该存储器1204用于存储指令,该处理器1202用于执行该存储器1204存储的指令,以实现如上图2、图4或图6中所示的任一项或任意多项对应的方法中制图设备的相关方案,或执行上述实施例一至实施例三所示任一实施例中制图设备所执行的方法。When the lane marking apparatus 1201 corresponds to a drawing device, the lane marking apparatus may include a processor 1202, a transceiver 1203 and a memory 1204. The memory 1204 is used for storing instructions, and the processor 1202 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 1204, so as to realize the drawing device in any one or any of the corresponding methods as shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 4 or FIG. 6 above. , or execute the method executed by the drawing device in any of the embodiments shown in the first embodiment to the third embodiment.
当车道线标注装置1201为制图设备,且执行实施例一时:收发器1203可以接收采集车辆上报的环境图像,处理器1202可以根据环境图像构建点云地图,并获取点云地图上车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,确定从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线,在第一车道线与路口中的障碍物相交,或者第一车道线与障碍物之间的最小距离小于预设的避障距离的情况下,从第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定出与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的第二车道线,并在地图上标注第二车道线。When the lane marking device 1201 is a mapping device and the first embodiment is implemented: the transceiver 1203 can receive the environmental image reported by the collected vehicle, and the processor 1202 can construct a point cloud map according to the environmental image, and obtain the vehicle entering the intersection on the point cloud map the entry point of the vehicle, and the exit point of the vehicle exiting the intersection, determine the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, where the first lane line intersects the obstacle in the intersection, or the first lane line and When the minimum distance between obstacles is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select the target obstacle avoidance area within the target obstacle avoidance area. At least one control point whose distance is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, determine the second lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance , and mark the second lane line on the map.
当车道线标注装置1201为制图设备,且执行实施例二时:收发器1203可以接收采集车辆上报的环境图像,处理器1202可以根据环境图像构建点云地图,并获取点云地图上车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,在路口中选取至少两个控制点,根据驶入点、驶出点和至少两个控制点,确定至少两条第一车道线,且至少两条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线所使用的控制点不同,之后从至少两条第一车道线中确定出与路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,在地图上标注所述目标第一车道线。When the lane marking device 1201 is a mapping device, and the second embodiment is implemented: the transceiver 1203 can receive the environmental image reported by the collected vehicle, and the processor 1202 can construct a point cloud map according to the environmental image, and obtain the vehicle entry on the point cloud map. The entry point of the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle exiting the intersection, at least two control points are selected in the intersection, and at least two first lane lines are determined according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, And the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different, and then it is determined from the at least two first lane lines that the minimum distance to the obstacle in the intersection is not less than the preset value. The target first lane line of the obstacle avoidance distance, and the target first lane line is marked on the map.
该车道线标注装置1201所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的制图设备的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For the concepts related to the technical solution of the drawing device provided by the embodiment of the present application, the explanation and detailed description and other steps involved in the lane marking device 1201 refer to the description of the content in the foregoing method or other embodiments. Do repeat.
基于以上实施例以及相同构思,图13示例性示出本申请实施例提供的另一种车道线标注装置的结构示意图,如图13所示,该车道线标注装置1301可以为制图设备,示例性地可以为如实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例所述的制图设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于制图设备中的芯片或电路。该车道线标注装置可以实现如上图2、图4或图6中所示的任一项或任意多项对应的方法中制图设备所执行的步骤,或执行上述实施例一至实施例三所示任一实施例中制图设备所执行的方法。如图13所示,该车道线标注装置1301可以包括获取单元1302、确定单元1303、选择单元1304和标注单元1305。Based on the above embodiments and the same concept, FIG. 13 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of another lane marking device provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13 , the lane marking device 1301 may be a drawing device, an exemplary The ground may be the drawing device described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, or may be a chip or a circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in the drawing device. The lane marking device can implement the steps performed by the drawing device in any one or more of the corresponding methods shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or FIG. A method performed by a drawing device in one embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13 , the lane marking device 1301 may include an acquiring unit 1302 , a determining unit 1303 , a selecting unit 1304 and a marking unit 1305 .
当车道线标注装置1301为制图设备,且执行实施例一时:获取单元1302可以获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,确定单元1303在第一车道线与路口中的障碍物相交,或者第一车道线与障碍物之间的最小距离小于预设的避障距离的情况下,可以确定出从驶入点移动至驶出点的第一车道线,选择单元1304可以从第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,在目标避障区域内选择与障碍物的距离不小于预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,确定单元1303还可以根据驶入点、至少一个控制点和驶出点,确定第二车道线,第二车道线与障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离,之后由标注单元1305在地图上标注第二车道线。When the lane marking device 1301 is a drawing device, and the first embodiment is implemented: the obtaining unit 1302 can obtain the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, and the determining unit 1303 is at the first lane line and the intersection. In the case where the obstacles in the line intersect, or the minimum distance between the first lane line and the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point can be determined, and the selection unit 1304 may select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, select at least one control point within the target obstacle avoidance area whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and determine The unit 1303 can also determine the second lane line according to the entry point, at least one control point and the exit point. The minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, and then the labeling unit 1305 will use the map on the map. Mark the second lane line above.
当车道线标注装置1301为制图设备,且执行实施例二时:获取单元1302可以获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点,选择单元1304可以在路口中选取至少两个控制点,确定单元1303可以根据驶入点、驶出点和至少两个控制点,确定至少两 条第一车道线,并从至少两条第一车道线中确定出与路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,其中至少两条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线所使用的控制点不同,之后由标注单元1305在地图上标注目标第一车道线。When the lane marking device 1301 is a drawing device and the second embodiment is implemented: the obtaining unit 1302 can obtain the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection, and the selection unit 1304 can select at least Two control points, the determining unit 1303 may determine at least two first lane lines according to the entry point, exit point and at least two control points, and determine obstacles in the intersection from the at least two first lane lines The minimum distance of the object is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance of the target first lane line, wherein the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different. Mark the target first lane line on it.
应理解,以上车道线标注装置1301的单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。该车道线标注装置1301所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。It should be understood that the above division of the units of the lane marking device 1301 is only a division of logical functions, and may be fully or partially integrated into a physical entity in actual implementation, or may be physically separated. For the concepts related to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application involved in the lane marking device 1301, please refer to the descriptions of the foregoing methods or other embodiments for explanations, detailed descriptions and other steps, which will not be repeated here.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2、图4或图6所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or The method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 .
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2、图4或图6所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 2 and FIG. 4 . Or the method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 .
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种车辆,车辆可以采集环境图像,并基于环境图像构建点云地图,之后执行如上图2、图4或图6中所示的任一项或任意多项对应的方法中制图设备所执行的步骤,以在点云地图上标注能避开障碍物的车道线。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a vehicle, the vehicle can collect an environment image, build a point cloud map based on the environment image, and then execute any one of the above shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or FIG. 6 . or any number of steps performed by the mapping device in the corresponding method to mark lane lines that can avoid obstacles on the point cloud map.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种车联网系统,其包括前述的车辆以及制图设备,车辆可以采集环境图像后发送给制图设备,制图设备可以基于环境图像构建点云地图,并执行如上图2、图4或图6中所示的任一项或任意多项对应的方法中制图设备所执行的步骤,以在点云地图上标注能避开障碍物的车道线。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides an Internet of Vehicles system, which includes the aforementioned vehicle and a mapping device. The vehicle can collect an environment image and send it to the mapping device, and the mapping device can construct a point cloud map based on the environment image. And perform the steps performed by the mapping device in any one or more of the corresponding methods shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 or FIG. 6 to mark the lane lines that can avoid obstacles on the point cloud map.
上述实施例可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state drive,SSD))等。The above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, high-density digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state drives, SSD)) etc.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.
Claims (27)
- 一种车道线标注方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for marking lane lines, characterized in that the method comprises:获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点;Obtain the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection;确定从所述驶入点移动至所述驶出点的第一车道线,其中,所述第一车道线与所述路口中的障碍物相交,或者所述第一车道线与所述障碍物之间的最小距离小于预设的避障距离;determining a first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, wherein the first lane line intersects an obstacle in the intersection or the first lane line intersects the obstacle The minimum distance between them is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance;从所述第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域;Select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area;在所述目标避障区域内选择与所述障碍物的距离不小于所述预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点;In the target obstacle avoidance area, select at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance;根据所述驶入点、所述至少一个控制点和所述驶出点,确定第二车道线,所述第二车道线与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于所述预设的避障距离;A second lane line is determined according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance ;在地图上标注所述第二车道线。The second lane line is marked on the map.
- 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标避障区域满足如下条件中的至少一项:The method of claim 1, wherein the target obstacle avoidance area satisfies at least one of the following conditions:位于具有交规指示功能的所述障碍物所指示的避障区域内;be located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication;在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物不相交的情况下,不包含所述障碍物;In the case that the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, the obstacle is not included;在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物相交的情况下,包含被所述第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中的面积最小的障碍物区域;In the case that the first lane line intersects the obstacle, including the obstacle area with the smallest area among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line;或者,or,在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物相交的情况下,包含被所述第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中距离所述第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域。In the case where the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the obstacle area with the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line is included.
- 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一车道线与所述障碍物相交时:The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein when the first lane line intersects the obstacle:所述在所述目标避障区域内选择与所述障碍物的距离不小于所述预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,包括:The selecting, in the target obstacle avoidance area, at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance includes:从所述目标避障区域内包含的障碍物区域的边缘上找到距离所述第一车道线最远的第一位置点;Find the first position point farthest from the first lane line on the edge of the obstacle area included in the target obstacle avoidance area;在所述目标避障区域内确定出与所述第一位置点的距离为所述预设的避障距离的第二位置点,且所述第二位置点与所述第一位置点的连线垂直于所述第一车道线的切线,或垂直于所述第一车道线与所述障碍物的两个交点之间的线段;In the target obstacle avoidance area, a second position point whose distance from the first position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined, and the connection between the second position point and the first position point is The line is perpendicular to the tangent of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersections of the first lane line and the obstacle;将所述第二位置点作为一个所述控制点。Take the second position point as one of the control points.
- 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一车道线与所述障碍物不相交时:The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein when the first lane line does not intersect the obstacle:所述在所述目标避障区域内选择与所述障碍物的距离不小于所述预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点,包括:The selecting, in the target obstacle avoidance area, at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance includes:从所述障碍物的边缘上找到距离所述第一车道线最近的第三位置点;Find the third position point closest to the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle;在所述目标避障区域内确定出与所述第三位置点的距离为所述预设的避障距离的第四位置点,且所述第四位置点与所述第三位置点的连线垂直于所述第一车道线的切线,或垂直于所述障碍物在所述第三位置点处的切线;In the target obstacle avoidance area, a fourth position point whose distance from the third position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined, and the connection between the fourth position point and the third position point is the line is perpendicular to the tangent of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent of the obstacle at the third position point;将所述第四位置点作为一个所述控制点。The fourth position point is used as one of the control points.
- 如权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 3 or 4, wherein the method further comprises:自所述控制点沿垂直于所述连线的方向绘制控制线;Drawing a control line from the control point in a direction perpendicular to the connecting line;从所述控制线上选取分别位于所述控制点两侧的至少两个第五位置点;Select at least two fifth position points on both sides of the control point from the control line;将所述至少两个第五位置点作为至少两个所述控制点。The at least two fifth position points are used as at least two of the control points.
- 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少两个所述控制点包括如下内容中的至少一项:The method of claim 5, wherein the at least two control points include at least one of the following:所述控制线与驶入线的交点、以及所述控制线与驶出线的交点,所述驶入线为自所述驶入点沿着驶入方向所作的直线,所述驶出线为自所述驶出点沿着驶出反方向所作的直线;The intersection of the control line and the entry line, and the intersection of the control line and the exit line, the entry line is a straight line drawn along the entry direction from the entry point, and the exit line is a straight line drawn from said exit point in the opposite direction of exit;所述控制线上的与所述控制点的距离等于所述第一车道线和所述障碍物的两个交点之间的线段长度的两个点;two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the line segment between the two intersections of the first lane line and the obstacle;或者,or,所述控制线上的与所述控制点的距离等于所述障碍物内部的第一车道线长度的两个点。Two points on the control line at a distance from the control point equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle.
- 如权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定从所述驶入点移动至所述驶出点的第一车道线,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the determining the first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point comprises:自所述驶入点沿着驶入方向延长得到驶入线;The approach line is extended from the approach point in the approach direction;自所述驶出点沿着驶出方向的反方向延长得到驶出线;The exit line is extended from the exit point in the opposite direction of the exit direction;根据所述驶入点、所述驶入线和所述驶出线的交点、以及所述驶出点,确定所述第一车道线。The first lane line is determined from the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point.
- 一种车道线标注方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for marking lane lines, characterized in that the method comprises:获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点;Obtain the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection;在所述路口中选取至少两个控制点;selecting at least two control points in the intersection;根据所述驶入点、所述驶出点和所述至少两个控制点,确定至少两条第一车道线;所述至少两条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线所使用的控制点不同;According to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, at least two first lane lines are determined; any two first lane lines in the at least two first lane lines are used different control points;从所述至少两条第一车道线中确定出与所述路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线;Determine, from the at least two first lane lines, a target first lane line whose minimum distance from the obstacle in the intersection is not less than a preset obstacle avoidance distance;在地图上标注所述目标第一车道线。Mark the target first lane line on the map.
- 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述在所述路口中选取至少两个控制点,包括:The method of claim 8, wherein the selecting at least two control points in the intersection comprises:在所述路口中选择与所述障碍物的距离大于所述预设的避障距离的所述至少两个控制点。The at least two control points whose distance from the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance are selected in the intersection.
- 如权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述从所述至少两条第一车道线中确定出与所述路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the minimum distance determined from the at least two first lane lines to the obstacle in the intersection is not less than a preset obstacle avoidance distance Target first lane lines, including:若所述障碍物为具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则从位于所述障碍物所指示的目标避障区域内的第一车道线中选择所述目标第一车道线;If the obstacle is an obstacle with a traffic rule indication function, selecting the target first lane line from the first lane lines located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle;若所述障碍物为不具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则从所述至少两条第一车道线中选择所述目标第一车道线;If the obstacle is an obstacle without a traffic rule indication function, selecting the target first lane line from the at least two first lane lines;其中,所述目标第一车道线与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于所述预设的避障距离。Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- 如权利要求8至10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein the method further comprises:若所述至少两条第一车道线中不包含与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线,则:If the at least two first lane lines do not include the target first lane line whose minimum distance to the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance, then:从所述至少两条第一车道线中选择基准第一车道线;selecting a reference first lane line from the at least two first lane lines;从所述基准第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域;Select one of the areas on both sides of the reference first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area;在所述目标避障区域内选择与所述障碍物的距离不小于所述预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点;In the target obstacle avoidance area, select at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance;根据所述驶入点、所述至少一个控制点和所述驶出点,确定第二车道线,所述第二车道线与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于所述预设的避障距离;A second lane line is determined according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance ;在地图上标注所述第二车道线。The second lane line is marked on the map.
- 一种车道线标注装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for marking lane lines, comprising:获取单元,用于获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点;an obtaining unit for obtaining the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection;确定单元,用于确定从所述驶入点移动至所述驶出点的第一车道线,其中,所述第一车道线与所述路口中的障碍物相交,或者所述第一车道线与所述障碍物之间的最小距离小于预设的避障距离;a determining unit for determining a first lane line moving from the entry point to the exit point, wherein the first lane line intersects an obstacle in the intersection, or the first lane line The minimum distance to the obstacle is less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance;选择单元,用于从所述第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,在所述目标避障区域内选择与所述障碍物的距离不小于所述预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点;a selection unit, configured to select one of the areas on both sides of the first lane line as the target obstacle avoidance area, and select the distance from the obstacle in the target obstacle avoidance area to be not less than the preset at least one control point of the obstacle avoidance distance;所述确定单元,还用于根据所述驶入点、所述至少一个控制点和所述驶出点,确定第二车道线,所述第二车道线与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于所述预设的避障距离;The determining unit is further configured to determine a second lane line according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance;标注单元,用于在地图上标注所述第二车道线。A labeling unit, used for labeling the second lane line on the map.
- 如权利要求12所述的装置,其特征在于,所述目标避障区域满足如下条件中的至少一项:The device of claim 12, wherein the target obstacle avoidance area satisfies at least one of the following conditions:位于具有交规指示功能的所述障碍物所指示的避障区域内;be located in the obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle with the function of traffic regulation indication;在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物不相交的情况下,不包含所述障碍物;In the case that the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, the obstacle is not included;在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物相交的情况下,包含被所述第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中的面积最小的障碍物区域;In the case that the first lane line intersects the obstacle, including the obstacle area with the smallest area among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line;或者,or,在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物相交的情况下,包含被所述第一车道线划分的两个障碍物区域中距离所述第一车道线的最远距离最小的障碍物区域。In the case where the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the obstacle area with the smallest distance from the first lane line among the two obstacle areas divided by the first lane line is included.
- 如权利要求12或13所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物相交的情况下,所述选择单元具体用于:The device according to claim 12 or 13, characterized in that in the case that the first lane line intersects the obstacle, the selection unit is specifically configured to:从所述目标避障区域内包含的障碍物区域的边缘上找到距离所述第一车道线最远的第一位置点;Find the first position point farthest from the first lane line on the edge of the obstacle area included in the target obstacle avoidance area;在所述目标避障区域内确定出与所述第一位置点的距离为所述预设的避障距离的第二位置点,且所述第二位置点与所述第一位置点的连线垂直于所述第一车道线的切线,或垂直于所述第一车道线与所述障碍物的两个交点之间的线段;In the target obstacle avoidance area, a second position point whose distance from the first position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined, and the connection between the second position point and the first position point is The line is perpendicular to the tangent of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the line segment between the two intersections of the first lane line and the obstacle;将所述第二位置点作为一个所述控制点。Take the second position point as one of the control points.
- 如权利要求12或13所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述第一车道线与所述障碍物不相交的情况下,所述选择单元具体用于:The device according to claim 12 or 13, characterized in that, in the case that the first lane line does not intersect with the obstacle, the selection unit is specifically configured to:从所述障碍物的边缘上找到距离所述第一车道线最近的第三位置点;Find the third position point closest to the first lane line from the edge of the obstacle;在所述目标避障区域内确定出与所述第三位置点的距离为所述预设的避障距离的第四位置点,且所述第四位置点与所述第三位置点的连线垂直于所述第一车道线的切线,或垂直于所述障碍物在所述第三位置点处的切线;In the target obstacle avoidance area, a fourth position point whose distance from the third position point is the preset obstacle avoidance distance is determined, and the connection between the fourth position point and the third position point is the line is perpendicular to the tangent of the first lane line, or perpendicular to the tangent of the obstacle at the third position point;将所述第四位置点作为一个所述控制点。The fourth position point is used as one of the control points.
- 如权利要求14或15所述的装置,其特征在于,所述选择单元还用于:The device according to claim 14 or 15, wherein the selection unit is further used for:自所述控制点沿垂直于所述连线的方向绘制控制线;Drawing a control line from the control point in a direction perpendicular to the connecting line;从所述控制线上选取分别位于所述控制点两侧的至少两个第五位置点;Select at least two fifth position points on both sides of the control point from the control line;将所述至少两个第五位置点作为至少两个所述控制点。The at least two fifth position points are used as at least two of the control points.
- 如权利要求16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述至少两个所述控制点包括如下内容中的至少一项:The apparatus of claim 16, wherein the at least two control points comprise at least one of the following:所述控制线与驶入线的交点、以及所述控制线与驶出线的交点,所述驶入线为自所述驶入点沿着驶入方向所作的直线,所述驶出线为自所述驶出点沿着驶出反方向所作的直线;The intersection of the control line and the entry line, and the intersection of the control line and the exit line, the entry line is a straight line drawn along the entry direction from the entry point, and the exit line is a straight line drawn from said exit point in the opposite direction of exit;所述控制线上的与所述控制点的距离等于所述第一车道线和所述障碍物的两个交点之间的线段长度的两个点;two points on the control line whose distance from the control point is equal to the length of the line segment between the two intersections of the first lane line and the obstacle;或者,or,所述控制线上的与所述控制点的距离等于所述障碍物内部的第一车道线长度的两个点。Two points on the control line at a distance from the control point equal to the length of the first lane line inside the obstacle.
- 如权利要求12至17任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元具体用于:The device according to any one of claims 12 to 17, wherein the determining unit is specifically configured to:自所述驶入点沿着驶入方向延长得到驶入线;The approach line is extended from the approach point in the approach direction;自所述驶出点沿着驶出方向的反方向延长得到驶出线;The exit line is extended from the exit point in the opposite direction of the exit direction;根据所述驶入点、所述驶入线和所述驶出线的交点、以及所述驶出点,确定所述第一车道线。The first lane line is determined from the entry point, the intersection of the entry line and the exit line, and the exit point.
- 一种车道线标注装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for marking lane lines, comprising:获取单元,用于获取车辆驶入路口的驶入点、以及车辆驶出路口的驶出点;an obtaining unit for obtaining the entry point of the vehicle entering the intersection and the exit point of the vehicle leaving the intersection;选择单元,用于在所述路口中选取至少两个控制点;a selection unit for selecting at least two control points in the intersection;确定单元,用于根据所述驶入点、所述驶出点和所述至少两个控制点,确定至少两条第一车道线,从所述至少两条第一车道线中确定出与所述路口中的障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线;其中,所述至少两条第一车道线中的任意两条第一车道线所使用的控制点不同;A determination unit, configured to determine at least two first lane lines according to the entry point, the exit point and the at least two control points, and determine from the at least two first lane lines the The minimum distance of the obstacles in the intersection is not less than the target first lane line of the preset obstacle avoidance distance; wherein, the control points used by any two of the at least two first lane lines are different ;标注单元,用于在地图上标注所述目标第一车道线。The labeling unit is used for labeling the target first lane line on the map.
- 如权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述选择单元具体用于:The apparatus of claim 19, wherein the selection unit is specifically used for:在所述路口中选择与所述障碍物的距离大于所述预设的避障距离的所述至少两个控制点。The at least two control points whose distance from the obstacle is greater than the preset obstacle avoidance distance are selected in the intersection.
- 如权利要求19或20所述的装置,其特征在于,所述确定单元具体用于:The device according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the determining unit is specifically configured to:若所述障碍物为具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则从位于所述障碍物所指示的目标避障区域内的第一车道线中选择所述目标第一车道线;If the obstacle is an obstacle with a traffic rule indication function, selecting the target first lane line from the first lane lines located in the target obstacle avoidance area indicated by the obstacle;若所述障碍物为不具有交规指示功能的障碍物,则从所述至少两条第一车道线中选择所述目标第一车道线;If the obstacle is an obstacle without a traffic rule indication function, selecting the target first lane line from the at least two first lane lines;其中,所述目标第一车道线与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于所述预设的避障距离。Wherein, the minimum distance between the target first lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance.
- 如权利要求19至21任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述至少两条第一车道线 中不包含与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于预设的避障距离的目标第一车道线时:The device according to any one of claims 19 to 21, wherein the at least two first lane lines do not include a target No. 1 whose minimum distance from the obstacle is not less than a preset obstacle avoidance distance. For one lane line:所述选择单元还用于:从所述至少两条第一车道线中选择基准第一车道线,从所述基准第一车道线的两侧区域中选择其中一侧区域作为目标避障区域,在所述目标避障区域内选择与所述障碍物的距离不小于所述预设的避障距离的至少一个控制点;The selection unit is further configured to: select a reference first lane line from the at least two first lane lines, and select one of the regions from the two sides of the reference first lane line as a target obstacle avoidance region, In the target obstacle avoidance area, select at least one control point whose distance from the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance;所述确定单元还用于:根据所述驶入点、所述至少一个控制点和所述驶出点,确定第二车道线,所述第二车道线与所述障碍物的最小距离不小于所述预设的避障距离;The determining unit is further configured to: determine a second lane line according to the entry point, the at least one control point and the exit point, and the minimum distance between the second lane line and the obstacle is not less than the preset obstacle avoidance distance;所述标注单元还用于:在地图上标注所述第二车道线。The labeling unit is further used for: labeling the second lane line on the map.
- 一种车道线标注装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储计算机程序,所述处理器运行所述计算机程序以实现如上述权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法、或实现如上述权利要求8至11任一项所述的方法。A lane marking device, characterized in that it comprises a processor and a memory, the memory stores a computer program, and the processor runs the computer program to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, Or implement a method as claimed in any one of the preceding claims 8 to 11.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被运行时,实现如上述权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法、或实现如上述权利要求8至11任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of the preceding claims 1 to 7, or A method as claimed in any of the preceding claims 8 to 11 is carried out.
- 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在处理器上运行时,实现如上述权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法、或实现如上述权利要求8至11任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product is run on a processor, the method according to any one of the above claims 1 to 7 or any one of the above claims 8 to 11 is realized. method described in item.
- 一种车辆,其特征在于,所述车辆用于执行:A vehicle, characterized in that the vehicle is used to perform:采集环境图像;Collect environmental images;构建点云地图;以及build a point cloud map; and根据权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法在所述点云地图上标注车道线。The method according to any one of claims 1-11 marks lane lines on the point cloud map.
- 一种车联网系统,其特征在于,包括车辆和制图设备,所述车辆用于采集环境图像并将所述环境图像发送给所述制图设备,所述制图设备用于利用所述环境图像构建点云地图,以及根据权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法在所述点云地图上标注车道线。An Internet of Vehicles system, characterized in that it includes a vehicle and a drawing device, the vehicle is used to collect an environmental image and send the environmental image to the drawing device, and the drawing device is used to construct a point using the environmental image A cloud map, and marking lane lines on the point cloud map according to the method according to any one of claims 1-11.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202110484993.4 | 2021-04-30 | ||
CN202110484993.4A CN115265564A (en) | 2021-04-30 | 2021-04-30 | Lane line marking method and device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022227878A1 true WO2022227878A1 (en) | 2022-11-03 |
Family
ID=83745573
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2022/080026 WO2022227878A1 (en) | 2021-04-30 | 2022-03-09 | Lane line labeling method and apparatus |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN115265564A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2022227878A1 (en) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN116699644A (en) * | 2023-08-07 | 2023-09-05 | 四川华腾公路试验检测有限责任公司 | Marking reliability assessment method based on three-dimensional laser radar |
CN117093663A (en) * | 2023-10-20 | 2023-11-21 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | Data processing method and related device of electronic map |
CN117521301A (en) * | 2023-10-18 | 2024-02-06 | 龙源(北京)新能源工程设计研究院有限公司 | Self-adaptive line selection method and device for extra-high voltage transmission line with ground object capable of automatically avoiding obstacle |
CN118605542A (en) * | 2024-08-07 | 2024-09-06 | 成都赛力斯科技有限公司 | Vehicle obstacle detouring method in urban driving scene, electronic equipment and storage medium |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117115773B (en) * | 2023-10-23 | 2024-04-09 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | Stop line generation method, apparatus, electronic device, medium, and program product |
Citations (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN102171084A (en) * | 2008-09-30 | 2011-08-31 | 日产自动车株式会社 | System provided with an assistance-controller for assisting an operator of the system, control-operation assisting device, control-operation assisting method, driving-operation assisting device, and driving-operation assisting method |
US20170284812A1 (en) * | 2016-04-01 | 2017-10-05 | Here Global B.V. | Road Geometry Matching with Componentized Junction Models |
US20170301232A1 (en) * | 2016-04-13 | 2017-10-19 | Here Global B.V. | Intersection Map Message Creation for Vehicle Communication |
US20170371337A1 (en) * | 2016-06-24 | 2017-12-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Dynamic lane definition |
CN109470254A (en) * | 2018-10-31 | 2019-03-15 | 百度在线网络技术(北京)有限公司 | Generation method, device, system and the storage medium of map lane line |
CN111238497A (en) * | 2018-11-29 | 2020-06-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | High-precision map construction method and device |
US20200292323A1 (en) * | 2019-03-13 | 2020-09-17 | Here Global B.V. | Maplets for maintaining and updating a self-healing high definition map |
CN112556718A (en) * | 2019-09-25 | 2021-03-26 | 通用汽车环球科技运作有限责任公司 | Inferring lane boundaries via high speed vehicle telemetry |
CN112703506A (en) * | 2020-04-22 | 2021-04-23 | 华为技术有限公司 | Lane line detection method and device |
-
2021
- 2021-04-30 CN CN202110484993.4A patent/CN115265564A/en active Pending
-
2022
- 2022-03-09 WO PCT/CN2022/080026 patent/WO2022227878A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN102171084A (en) * | 2008-09-30 | 2011-08-31 | 日产自动车株式会社 | System provided with an assistance-controller for assisting an operator of the system, control-operation assisting device, control-operation assisting method, driving-operation assisting device, and driving-operation assisting method |
US20170284812A1 (en) * | 2016-04-01 | 2017-10-05 | Here Global B.V. | Road Geometry Matching with Componentized Junction Models |
US20170301232A1 (en) * | 2016-04-13 | 2017-10-19 | Here Global B.V. | Intersection Map Message Creation for Vehicle Communication |
US20170371337A1 (en) * | 2016-06-24 | 2017-12-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Dynamic lane definition |
CN109470254A (en) * | 2018-10-31 | 2019-03-15 | 百度在线网络技术(北京)有限公司 | Generation method, device, system and the storage medium of map lane line |
CN111238497A (en) * | 2018-11-29 | 2020-06-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | High-precision map construction method and device |
US20200292323A1 (en) * | 2019-03-13 | 2020-09-17 | Here Global B.V. | Maplets for maintaining and updating a self-healing high definition map |
CN112556718A (en) * | 2019-09-25 | 2021-03-26 | 通用汽车环球科技运作有限责任公司 | Inferring lane boundaries via high speed vehicle telemetry |
CN112703506A (en) * | 2020-04-22 | 2021-04-23 | 华为技术有限公司 | Lane line detection method and device |
Cited By (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN116699644A (en) * | 2023-08-07 | 2023-09-05 | 四川华腾公路试验检测有限责任公司 | Marking reliability assessment method based on three-dimensional laser radar |
CN116699644B (en) * | 2023-08-07 | 2023-10-27 | 四川华腾公路试验检测有限责任公司 | Marking reliability assessment method based on three-dimensional laser radar |
CN117521301A (en) * | 2023-10-18 | 2024-02-06 | 龙源(北京)新能源工程设计研究院有限公司 | Self-adaptive line selection method and device for extra-high voltage transmission line with ground object capable of automatically avoiding obstacle |
CN117521301B (en) * | 2023-10-18 | 2024-06-11 | 龙源(北京)新能源工程设计研究院有限公司 | Self-adaptive line selection method and device for extra-high voltage transmission line with ground object capable of automatically avoiding obstacle |
CN117093663A (en) * | 2023-10-20 | 2023-11-21 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | Data processing method and related device of electronic map |
CN117093663B (en) * | 2023-10-20 | 2024-01-30 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | Data processing method and related device of electronic map |
CN118605542A (en) * | 2024-08-07 | 2024-09-06 | 成都赛力斯科技有限公司 | Vehicle obstacle detouring method in urban driving scene, electronic equipment and storage medium |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN115265564A (en) | 2022-11-01 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2022227878A1 (en) | Lane line labeling method and apparatus | |
WO2021104180A1 (en) | Map generation method, positioning method, apparatus, device, storage medium, and computer program | |
CN111923910B (en) | Method for planning lane change of vehicle, autonomous vehicle and storage medium | |
US11377096B2 (en) | Automatic parking method and device | |
US20200265710A1 (en) | Travelling track prediction method and device for vehicle | |
CN110889965B (en) | Unmanned vehicle control method and device and unmanned vehicle | |
US20200269873A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for planning speed of autonomous vehicle, and storage medium | |
KR102094622B1 (en) | Scene evaluation device, driving support device, scene evaluation method | |
KR102092484B1 (en) | Scene evaluation device, driving support device, scene evaluation method | |
EP3548846A1 (en) | Systems and methods for navigating with sensing uncertainty | |
BR112018001165B1 (en) | DRIVING PLANNING DEVICE, TRAVEL AID DEVICE AND DRIVING PLANNING METHOD | |
JP7000637B2 (en) | Driving reference route processing methods, equipment, vehicles, and programs | |
BR112018001073B1 (en) | DRIVING PLANNING DEVICE, MOVEMENT AID APPLIANCE, AND DRIVING PLANNING METHOD | |
JP6956268B2 (en) | Driving environment information generation method, driving control method, driving environment information generation device | |
CN108171967B (en) | Traffic control method and device | |
US11615702B2 (en) | Determining vehicle path | |
CN112406905B (en) | Data processing method and device based on vehicle, computer and storage medium | |
CN115077557B (en) | Road junction turning-around path planning method | |
WO2023159839A1 (en) | Lane changing path planning method and apparatus, intelligent driving automobile, and storage medium | |
JP2022502311A (en) | Feature point extraction method and equipment for environmental targets | |
WO2022213373A1 (en) | Trajectory planning method and related device | |
BR112018001047B1 (en) | SCENE DETERMINATION DEVICE, DISPLACEMENT AID DEVICE AND SCENE DETERMINATION METHOD | |
WO2021170140A1 (en) | Lane structure detection method and apparatus | |
JP7123645B2 (en) | Driving support method and driving support device | |
WO2024066588A1 (en) | Vehicle control method and related apparatus |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22794357 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 22794357 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |